Upload
others
View
2
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Grade thresholds – November 2017
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email [email protected]
Cambridge IGCSE Computer Science (0478) Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0478 (Computer Science) in the November 2017 examination.
minimum raw mark required for grade:
maximum raw
mark available
A B C D E F G
Component 11 75 48 40 33 28 23 18 13
Component 12 75 49 41 34 28 23 18 13
Component 13 75 48 40 33 28 23 18 13
Component 21 50 31 23 16 12 9 6 3
Component 22 50 34 26 19 15 11 7 3
Component 23 50 31 23 16 12 9 6 3 Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component. The maximum total mark for this syllabus, after weighting has been applied, is 125. The overall thresholds for the different grades were set as follows.
Option Combination of Components A* A B C D E F G
AX 11, 21 93 78 63 49 40 32 24 16
AY 12, 22 97 82 67 53 43 34 25 16
AZ 13, 23 93 78 63 49 40 32 24 16
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 10 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/11 Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
2 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(a)
O
utpu
t 1
1(b)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t con
vers
ion
E
0 4
1 1
1 0
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 0
3
1(c)
A
ny o
ne fr
om:
– H
exad
ecim
al c
odes
can
fit i
n a
smal
ler d
ispl
ay ra
ther
than
a fu
ll te
xt b
ased
mes
sage
–
Sm
alle
r am
ount
of m
emor
y ne
eded
to s
tore
the
hex
erro
r mes
sage
s th
an te
xt b
ased
1
1(d)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
sen
sor,
1 m
ark
for c
orre
spon
ding
use
P
ossi
ble
exam
ples
cou
ld in
clud
e:
–
Tem
pera
ture
(sen
sor)
– To
mon
itor t
he te
mpe
ratu
re o
f the
wat
er
–
Pre
ssur
e (s
enso
r)
– To
mon
itor t
he le
vel o
f wat
er in
the
was
hing
mac
hine
– M
otio
n (s
enso
r)
– To
mon
itor w
heth
er th
e dr
um is
stil
l in
mot
ion
– pH
(sen
sor)
–
To m
onito
r the
leve
l of w
ater
har
dnes
s/de
terg
ent p
rese
nt in
the
wat
er
6
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
3 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t file
form
at e
.g.
Fi
le ty
pe
File
form
at
Pic
ture
s .J
PE
G
Text
.d
oc, .
txt,
.rtf,
.doc
x, .o
dt .p
df
Sou
nd
.mp3
, .w
av, .
aif,
.flac
, .m
id
Vid
eo
.mp4
, .flv
, .w
mv
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
–
Par
t 1
(acc
ess)
pro
toco
l –
Par
t 2
dom
ain
(nam
e)
– P
art 3
fil
enam
e
3
3(b)
Fo
ur fr
om:
– IP
add
ress
is u
sed
to id
entif
y a
devi
ce (o
n th
e In
tern
et /
netw
ork)
–
IP a
ddre
ss is
allo
cate
d by
the
netw
ork/
ISP
–
Can
be
used
in p
lace
of U
RL
– IP
add
ress
es c
an b
e IP
v4 o
r IP
v6
– IP
add
ress
can
be
stat
ic
–
... m
eani
ng it
doe
sn’t
chan
ge e
ach
time
it is
con
nect
ed to
the
Inte
rnet
–
IP a
ddre
ss c
an b
e dy
nam
ic
. –
mea
ning
that
it c
an c
hang
e ea
ch ti
me
a de
vice
is c
onne
cted
to th
e In
tern
et
– A
ny v
alid
exa
mpl
e (e
.g. x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx o
r xxx
x:xx
xx:x
xxx:
xxxx
:xxx
x:xx
xx:x
xxx:
xxxx
)
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
4 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t lin
e up
to a
tota
l of 5
mar
ks
5
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
5 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t log
ic g
ate
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
6 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
logi
c ga
te s
ymbo
l:
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– si
mila
r to
an O
R g
ate
– It
has
(at l
east
) tw
o in
puts
–
Out
put w
ill b
e hi
gh/1
if b
oth
inpu
ts a
re d
iffer
ent
– O
utpu
t will
be
high
/1 if
eith
er in
put i
s hi
gh
– O
utpu
t will
be
low
/0 if
bot
h in
puts
are
hig
h –
Out
put w
ill b
e lo
w/0
if b
oth
inpu
ts a
re lo
w
5
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6 A
ny s
ix fr
om:
2D
– (S
cann
er) s
hine
s a
light
ont
o th
e su
rface
of a
doc
umen
t // L
ight
mov
es a
cros
s do
cum
ent
– R
efle
cted
ligh
t is
capt
ured
–
Use
s m
irror
s an
d le
nses
–
Cap
ture
d im
age
is c
onve
rted
into
a d
igita
l file
–
Pro
duce
s a
2D d
igita
l im
age
3D
– S
cann
ers
shin
es a
lase
r (or
ligh
t) ov
er th
e su
rface
of a
3D
obj
ect
– R
ecor
ds m
easu
rem
ents
of t
he g
eom
etry
/dim
ensi
ons
of th
e ob
ject
–
Mea
sure
men
ts a
re c
onve
rted
to d
igita
l file
–
Pro
duce
s a
3D d
igita
l mod
el
6
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
7 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t tic
k
Stat
emen
t tr
ue
()
fals
e (
) Fi
rew
alls
can
mon
itor i
ncom
ing
and
outg
oing
traf
fic.
Fire
wal
ls o
pera
te b
y ch
ecki
ng tr
affic
aga
inst
a s
et o
f rul
es.
Fire
wal
ls c
anno
t blo
ck a
cces
s to
a c
erta
in w
ebsi
te.
Fire
wal
ls c
an b
e so
ftwar
e an
d ha
rdw
are.
Fire
wal
ls c
an a
ct a
s in
term
edia
ry s
erve
rs.
Fire
wal
ls c
an b
lock
una
utho
rised
traf
fic.
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
A
ny th
ree
from
: –
Hum
an e
rror
(e.g
. del
etin
g/ov
erw
ritin
g da
ta)
– P
hysi
cal d
amag
e
– P
ower
failu
re/s
urge
–
Har
dwar
e fa
ilure
–
Sof
twar
e cr
ashi
ng
3
8(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
: –
Onl
ine
shop
ping
// O
nlin
e pa
ymen
t sys
tem
s //
Onl
ine
book
ing
– E
mai
l –
Clo
ud b
ased
sto
rage
–
Intra
net/e
xtra
net
– V
PN
–
VoI
P //
vid
eo c
onfe
renc
ing
– In
stan
t mes
sagi
ng (I
M) /
/ soc
ial n
etw
orki
ng //
onl
ine
gam
ing
3
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
8 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(c)
1
mar
k fo
r ide
ntify
ing,
1 m
ark
for d
escr
iptio
n
– S
trong
pas
swor
d –
To m
ake
it di
fficu
lt to
hac
k an
acc
ount
– B
iom
etric
dev
ice
– To
use
dat
a th
at is
diff
icul
t to
fake
as
a pa
ssw
ord
–
TLS
// E
ncry
ptio
n –
To m
ake
data
mea
ning
less
if in
terc
epte
d –
To e
ncry
pt d
ata
that
is e
xcha
nged
(TLS
onl
y)
– M
ore
secu
re th
an S
SL
(TLS
onl
y)
– A
nti-s
pyw
are
(sof
twar
e)
– To
find
and
rem
ove
any
spyw
are
that
is in
stal
led
on a
com
pute
r –
To h
elp
stop
key
logg
ers
reco
rdin
g ke
y pr
esse
s
– Fi
rew
all
– To
hel
p pr
even
t una
utho
rised
acc
ess
to a
n ac
coun
t –
Blo
cks
any
requ
ests
that
do
not m
eet/m
atch
the
crite
ria
–
Aut
hent
icat
ion
(car
d re
ader
at h
ome)
/mob
ile s
ecur
ity c
ode
app/
two-
step
ver
ifica
tion
– To
add
ano
ther
leve
l of i
dent
ifica
tion
of th
e us
er
–
Use
of d
rop-
dow
n bo
xes
(or e
quiv
alen
t) –
So
key
logg
ers
cann
ot re
cord
the
key
pres
ses
–
Pro
xy s
erve
r –
To d
iver
t an
atta
ck a
way
from
the
mai
n sy
stem
6
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
9 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– (R
ed) l
aser
is u
sed
– (L
aser
bea
ms)
shi
nes
onto
sur
face
of t
he d
isk
– It
is ro
tate
d (a
t a c
onst
ant s
peed
) to
be re
ad
– S
urfa
ce is
cov
ered
in a
trac
k (th
at s
pira
ls fr
om th
e ce
ntre
) –
Dat
a is
repr
esen
ted
on th
e su
rface
usi
ng p
its a
nd la
nds
– P
its a
nd la
nds
repr
esen
t bin
ary
valu
es
– P
its re
flect
ligh
t bac
k di
ffere
ntly
(to
the
area
in b
etw
een/
land
) –
Opt
ical
dev
ice
can
dete
rmin
e th
e bi
nary
val
ue fr
om th
e lig
ht re
flect
ion
4
9(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cal
cula
tion,
1 m
ark
for c
orre
ct a
nsw
er:
–
1000
× 1
6 –
1600
0/8
–
Ans
wer
is 2
000
byte
s
2
9(c)
Fo
ur fr
om: (
Max
2 fo
r eith
er p
rimar
y or
sec
onda
ry)
–
Prim
ary
RA
M a
nd R
OM
–
Sec
onda
ry H
DD
and
SS
D
–
Prim
ary
is d
irect
ly a
cces
sibl
e by
CP
U
– S
econ
dary
is n
ot d
irect
ly a
cces
sibl
e by
CP
U
–
Prim
ary
is in
tern
al to
com
pute
r –
Sec
onda
ry c
an b
e in
tern
al o
r ext
erna
l to
the
com
pute
r
– P
rimar
y st
ores
boo
t up
inst
ruct
ions
and
can
hol
d da
ta w
hils
t bei
ng p
roce
ssed
–
Sec
onda
ry s
tore
s fil
es/s
oftw
are
–
Prim
ary
has
fast
er a
cces
s sp
eed
– S
econ
dary
has
a s
low
er a
cces
s sp
eed
–
Prim
ary
has
both
vol
atile
and
non
-vol
atile
–
Sec
onda
ry is
non
-vol
atile
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
10 o
f 10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10
1 m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect t
ick
Stat
emen
t tr
ue
()
fals
e (
) A
ssem
bly
lang
uage
use
s m
nem
onic
cod
es.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge p
rogr
ams
do n
ot n
eed
a tra
nsla
tor t
o be
exe
cute
d.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
a lo
w-le
vel p
rogr
amm
ing
lang
uage
.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
spe
cific
to th
e co
mpu
ter h
ardw
are.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
mac
hine
cod
e.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
ofte
n us
ed to
cre
ate
driv
ers
for h
ardw
are.
6
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 9 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12 Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
2 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1 1
mar
k pe
r cor
rect
inst
ruct
ion:
9
– LE
FT
1 –
DO
WN
C
– O
PE
N
3 –
CLO
SE
F
– U
P
5
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t cat
egor
y:
HD
D –
Sec
onda
ry
RA
M –
Prim
ary
RO
M –
Prim
ary
CD
-RO
M –
Off-
line
SS
D –
Sec
onda
ry
DV
D-R
AM
– O
ff-lin
e
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om (M
ax 2
per
num
ber s
yste
m) :
•
A b
inar
y nu
mbe
r sys
tem
is a
bas
e-2
syst
em
• A
den
ary
num
ber s
yste
m is
a b
ase-
10 s
yste
m
•
A b
inar
y nu
mbe
r sys
tem
use
s 0
and
1 va
lues
•
A d
enar
y nu
mbe
r sys
tem
use
s 0
to 9
val
ues
•
A b
inar
y nu
mbe
r sys
tem
has
uni
ts/ p
lace
hold
ers/
colu
mn
head
ings
that
incr
ease
by
the
pow
er o
f 2
• A
den
ary
num
ber s
yste
m h
as u
nits
/ pla
ceho
lder
s/co
lum
n he
adin
gs th
at in
crea
se b
y th
e po
wer
of 1
0
• B
inar
y ha
s m
ore
digi
t for
the
sam
e va
lue/
/ Den
ary
has
less
dig
its fo
r the
sam
e va
lue
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
3 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(b)
Fi
ve fr
om:
• C
orre
ct c
olum
n he
adin
gs /
plac
e ho
lder
s by
exa
mpl
e •
Cor
rect
ly p
lace
a 1
or a
0 fo
r eac
h co
lum
n
• Id
entif
y th
e co
lum
ns to
be
adde
d
• A
dd to
geth
er th
e (d
enar
y) v
alue
s id
entif
ied
•
this
will
giv
e a
tota
l whi
ch is
the
dena
ry n
umbe
r/ans
wer
•
Ans
wer
is 1
0
5
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4(a)
(i)
Met
hod
1 Ti
ck (
) M
etho
d 2
Tick
()
Ser
ial
S
impl
ex
Par
alle
l
Hal
f-dup
lex
Dup
lex
2
4(a)
(ii)
Any
four
from
(Max
3 fo
r ser
ial):
•
Ser
ial h
as le
ss/lo
wer
inte
rfere
nce
•
Ser
ial i
s (m
ore)
relia
ble/
accu
rate
ove
r dis
tanc
es
• In
ser
ial t
he b
its w
on’t
be s
kew
ed
• In
ser
ial i
t is
easi
er to
col
late
the
bits
toge
ther
aga
in a
fter t
rans
mis
sion
• D
uple
x tra
nsm
its d
ata
in b
oth
dire
ctio
ns a
t the
sam
e tim
e •
sim
plex
/hal
f-dup
lex/
rem
aini
ng m
etho
ds w
on’t
allo
w re
ad a
nd w
rite
at s
ame
time
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
4 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4(b)
1
mar
k fo
r err
or c
heck
ing
met
hod,
2 m
arks
for d
escr
iptio
n:
Che
cksu
m
• A
val
ue is
cal
cula
ted
from
the
data
// D
escr
iptio
n of
cal
cula
tion
•
Val
ue is
tran
smitt
ed w
ith d
ata
• V
alue
is re
calc
ulat
ed a
fter t
rans
mis
sion
•
If th
e va
lues
mat
ch th
e da
ta is
(mor
e lik
ely
to b
e) a
ccur
ate
Par
ity c
heck
•
A p
arity
bit
is tr
ansm
itted
with
eac
h by
te o
f dat
a •
Odd
or e
ven
(par
ity c
an b
e us
ed)
• C
ount
s / c
heck
s nu
mbe
r of 1
’s //
cou
nts
/ che
cks
to s
ee if
1’s
are
eve
n //
coun
ts /
chec
ks to
see
if 1
’s a
re o
dd
• (E
ach
byte
is) c
heck
ed a
fter t
rans
mis
sion
to s
ee if
it m
atch
es th
e od
d/ev
en p
arity
use
d A
utom
atic
Rep
eat R
eque
st (A
RQ
) •
Use
s ac
know
ledg
emen
t and
tim
eout
•
Whe
n a
devi
ce d
etec
ts a
n er
ror i
n da
ta tr
ansm
issi
on it
ask
s fo
r the
pac
ket t
o be
rese
nt /
no e
rror
det
ecte
d, p
ositi
ve
ackn
owle
dgm
ent s
ent
• Th
e se
ndin
g de
vice
rese
nds
the
pack
et a
fter t
he re
ques
t to
rese
nd/ t
imeo
ut re
ceiv
ed
• Th
is p
roce
ss is
con
tinuo
us u
ntil
the
pack
et re
ceiv
ed is
cor
rect
/unt
il th
e AR
Q li
mit
is re
ache
d E
cho
(che
ck)
• C
opy
of d
ata
is s
ent b
ack
to s
ende
r •
Dat
a is
com
pare
d to
see
if it
mat
ches
•
If it
does
not
mat
ch e
rror
det
ecte
d
6
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
5 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
• D
ata
/ file
s
• S
tore
d in
a te
xt fi
le
• D
ownl
oade
d to
a u
ser’s
com
pute
r whe
n a
web
site
is v
isite
d //
web
serv
er s
ends
to w
eb b
row
ser
• S
tore
d on
a u
ser’s
com
pute
r •
Sto
red
by a
bro
wse
r •
Det
ecte
d by
the
web
site
whe
n it
is v
isite
d ag
ain
4
5(b)
A
ny tw
o fro
m: e
.g.
• To
sto
re p
erso
nal i
nfor
mat
ion/
data
•
To s
tore
logi
n de
tails
•
To s
ave
item
s in
an
onlin
e sh
oppi
ng b
aske
t •
To tr
ack/
save
inte
rnet
sur
fing
habi
ts //
to tr
ack
web
site
traf
fic
• To
car
ry o
ut ta
rget
ed a
dver
tisin
g •
To s
tore
pay
men
t det
ails
•
To c
usto
mis
e a
web
page
// to
sto
re u
ser p
refe
renc
es
• S
tore
pro
gres
s in
onl
ine
gam
es/q
uizz
es
2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t ter
m, i
n th
is o
rder
: •
Inte
rrup
t •
Com
pile
r •
ALU
/Arit
hmet
ic a
nd L
ogic
Uni
t •
AR
Q/A
utom
atic
repe
at re
ques
t
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
6 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t log
ic g
ate
with
the
corr
ect i
nput
(s)
7
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
7 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
cal
cula
tion
met
hod,
1 m
ark
for c
orre
ct a
nsw
er:
•
2048
/102
4 (o
r 102
4 ×
2)
• 2
GB
2
8(b)
•
Inst
ruct
ions
/pro
gram
s/da
ta
• c
urre
ntly
in u
se
2
8(c)
A
ny th
ree
from
: •
RA
M is
vol
atile
, RO
M is
non
-vol
atile
•
RA
M is
tem
pora
ry, R
OM
is (s
emi)
perm
anen
t •
RA
M n
orm
ally
has
a la
rger
cap
acity
than
RO
M
• R
AM
can
be
edite
d R
OM
can
not b
e ed
ited
// D
ata
can
be re
ad fr
om a
nd w
ritte
n to
RA
M, R
OM
can
onl
y be
read
from
.
3
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
8 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9(a)
•
It is
an
inpu
t dev
ice
• It
mea
sure
s/ta
kes
(phy
sica
l) re
adin
gs o
f the
sur
roun
ding
env
ironm
ent /
env
ironm
ent b
y ex
ampl
e / p
hysi
cal p
rope
rties
2
9(b)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h se
nsor
, 2 m
arks
for e
ach
desc
riptio
n:
Moi
stur
e (s
enso
r)
• To
mea
sure
the
wat
er c
onte
nt o
f the
soi
l •
To a
lert
whe
n th
e so
il is
too
dry
or to
o w
et/n
eeds
wat
erin
g
pH
(sen
sor)
•
To m
easu
re h
ow a
cidi
c/al
kalin
e th
e so
il is
•
To a
lert
whe
n th
ere
may
be
som
ethi
ng p
ollu
ting
the
soil
Ligh
t (se
nsor
) •
To m
easu
re th
e br
ight
ness
of t
he e
nviro
nmen
t •
To a
lert
whe
n th
e fru
it ha
s to
o lit
tle/to
o m
uch
light
Tem
pera
ture
(sen
sor)
• To
mea
sure
the
tem
pera
ture
of t
he e
nviro
nmen
t •
To a
lert
whe
n it
is to
o ho
t/too
col
d fo
r the
frui
t to
grow
Gas
(sen
sor)
•
To m
easu
re th
e am
ount
of C
O2/
oxyg
en p
rese
nt
• To
ale
rt w
hen
too
muc
h C
O2/
oxyg
en p
rese
nt
Hum
idity
(sen
sor)
•
To m
easu
re th
e w
ater
con
tent
in th
e ai
r •
To a
lert
whe
n th
e ai
r is
too
dry
In
fra-r
ed /
mot
ion
(sen
sor)
•
To m
easu
re le
vel o
f inf
ra-r
ed/m
icro
wav
es d
efle
cted
•
To a
lert
to a
ny in
trude
rs e
.g. a
nim
als
stea
ling
the
fruit
6
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
9 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(a
) A
ny th
ree
from
: •
It is
a (s
ecur
ity) p
roto
col
• It
encr
ypts
dat
a (s
ent o
ver t
he w
eb/n
etw
ork)
•
It is
the
upda
ted
vers
ion
of S
SL
•
It ha
s tw
o la
yers
•
It ha
s a
hand
shak
e la
yer
• It
has
a re
cord
laye
r
3
10(b
) 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t app
licat
ion,
exa
mpl
es c
ould
incl
ude:
•
Onl
ine
bank
ing
• O
nlin
e sh
oppi
ng //
Onl
ine
paym
ent s
yste
ms
• E
mai
l •
Clo
ud b
ased
sto
rage
•
Intra
net/e
xtra
net
• V
PN
•
VoI
P
• In
stan
t mes
sagi
ng (I
M) /
/ soc
ial n
etw
orki
ng
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
11
1 m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect m
issi
ng w
ord,
in th
e co
rrect
ord
er:
•
Pla
giar
ism
•
Free
sof
twar
e •
Free
war
e
• S
hare
war
e
• E
thic
s
5
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 10 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/13 Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
2 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(a)
O
utpu
t 1
1(b)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t con
vers
ion
E
0 4
1 1
1 0
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 0
3
1(c)
A
ny o
ne fr
om:
– H
exad
ecim
al c
odes
can
fit i
n a
smal
ler d
ispl
ay ra
ther
than
a fu
ll te
xt b
ased
mes
sage
–
Sm
alle
r am
ount
of m
emor
y ne
eded
to s
tore
the
hex
erro
r mes
sage
s th
an te
xt b
ased
1
1(d)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
sen
sor,
1 m
ark
for c
orre
spon
ding
use
P
ossi
ble
exam
ples
cou
ld in
clud
e:
–
Tem
pera
ture
(sen
sor)
– To
mon
itor t
he te
mpe
ratu
re o
f the
wat
er
–
Pre
ssur
e (s
enso
r)
– To
mon
itor t
he le
vel o
f wat
er in
the
was
hing
mac
hine
– M
otio
n (s
enso
r)
– To
mon
itor w
heth
er th
e dr
um is
stil
l in
mot
ion
– pH
(sen
sor)
–
To m
onito
r the
leve
l of w
ater
har
dnes
s/de
terg
ent p
rese
nt in
the
wat
er
6
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
3 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t file
form
at e
.g.
Fi
le ty
pe
File
form
at
Pic
ture
s .J
PE
G
Text
.d
oc, .
txt,
.rtf,
.doc
x, .o
dt .p
df
Sou
nd
.mp3
, .w
av, .
aif,
.flac
, .m
id
Vid
eo
.mp4
, .flv
, .w
mv
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
–
Par
t 1
(acc
ess)
pro
toco
l –
Par
t 2
dom
ain
(nam
e)
– P
art 3
fil
enam
e
3
3(b)
Fo
ur fr
om:
– IP
add
ress
is u
sed
to id
entif
y a
devi
ce (o
n th
e In
tern
et /
netw
ork)
–
IP a
ddre
ss is
allo
cate
d by
the
netw
ork/
ISP
–
Can
be
used
in p
lace
of U
RL
– IP
add
ress
es c
an b
e IP
v4 o
r IP
v6
– IP
add
ress
can
be
stat
ic
–
... m
eani
ng it
doe
sn’t
chan
ge e
ach
time
it is
con
nect
ed to
the
Inte
rnet
–
IP a
ddre
ss c
an b
e dy
nam
ic
. –
mea
ning
that
it c
an c
hang
e ea
ch ti
me
a de
vice
is c
onne
cted
to th
e In
tern
et
– A
ny v
alid
exa
mpl
e (e
.g. x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx o
r xxx
x:xx
xx:x
xxx:
xxxx
:xxx
x:xx
xx:x
xxx:
xxxx
)
4
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
4 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t lin
e up
to a
tota
l of 5
mar
ks
5
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
5 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t log
ic g
ate
4
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
6 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
logi
c ga
te s
ymbo
l:
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– si
mila
r to
an O
R g
ate
– It
has
(at l
east
) tw
o in
puts
–
Out
put w
ill b
e hi
gh/1
if b
oth
inpu
ts a
re d
iffer
ent
– O
utpu
t will
be
high
/1 if
eith
er in
put i
s hi
gh
– O
utpu
t will
be
low
/0 if
bot
h in
puts
are
hig
h –
Out
put w
ill b
e lo
w/0
if b
oth
inpu
ts a
re lo
w
5
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6 A
ny s
ix fr
om:
2D
– (S
cann
er) s
hine
s a
light
ont
o th
e su
rface
of a
doc
umen
t // L
ight
mov
es a
cros
s do
cum
ent
– R
efle
cted
ligh
t is
capt
ured
–
Use
s m
irror
s an
d le
nses
–
Cap
ture
d im
age
is c
onve
rted
into
a d
igita
l file
–
Pro
duce
s a
2D d
igita
l im
age
3D
– S
cann
ers
shin
es a
lase
r (or
ligh
t) ov
er th
e su
rface
of a
3D
obj
ect
– R
ecor
ds m
easu
rem
ents
of t
he g
eom
etry
/dim
ensi
ons
of th
e ob
ject
–
Mea
sure
men
ts a
re c
onve
rted
to d
igita
l file
–
Pro
duce
s a
3D d
igita
l mod
el
6
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
7 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t tic
k
Stat
emen
t tr
ue
()
fals
e (
) Fi
rew
alls
can
mon
itor i
ncom
ing
and
outg
oing
traf
fic.
Fire
wal
ls o
pera
te b
y ch
ecki
ng tr
affic
aga
inst
a s
et o
f rul
es.
Fire
wal
ls c
anno
t blo
ck a
cces
s to
a c
erta
in w
ebsi
te.
Fire
wal
ls c
an b
e so
ftwar
e an
d ha
rdw
are.
Fire
wal
ls c
an a
ct a
s in
term
edia
ry s
erve
rs.
Fire
wal
ls c
an b
lock
una
utho
rised
traf
fic.
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
A
ny th
ree
from
: –
Hum
an e
rror
(e.g
. del
etin
g/ov
erw
ritin
g da
ta)
– P
hysi
cal d
amag
e
– P
ower
failu
re/s
urge
–
Har
dwar
e fa
ilure
–
Sof
twar
e cr
ashi
ng
3
8(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
: –
Onl
ine
shop
ping
// O
nlin
e pa
ymen
t sys
tem
s //
Onl
ine
book
ing
– E
mai
l –
Clo
ud b
ased
sto
rage
–
Intra
net/e
xtra
net
– V
PN
–
VoI
P //
vid
eo c
onfe
renc
ing
– In
stan
t mes
sagi
ng (I
M) /
/ soc
ial n
etw
orki
ng //
onl
ine
gam
ing
3
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
8 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(c)
1
mar
k fo
r ide
ntify
ing,
1 m
ark
for d
escr
iptio
n
– S
trong
pas
swor
d –
To m
ake
it di
fficu
lt to
hac
k an
acc
ount
– B
iom
etric
dev
ice
– To
use
dat
a th
at is
diff
icul
t to
fake
as
a pa
ssw
ord
–
TLS
// E
ncry
ptio
n –
To m
ake
data
mea
ning
less
if in
terc
epte
d –
To e
ncry
pt d
ata
that
is e
xcha
nged
(TLS
onl
y)
– M
ore
secu
re th
an S
SL
(TLS
onl
y)
– A
nti-s
pyw
are
(sof
twar
e)
– To
find
and
rem
ove
any
spyw
are
that
is in
stal
led
on a
com
pute
r –
To h
elp
stop
key
logg
ers
reco
rdin
g ke
y pr
esse
s
– Fi
rew
all
– To
hel
p pr
even
t una
utho
rised
acc
ess
to a
n ac
coun
t –
Blo
cks
any
requ
ests
that
do
not m
eet/m
atch
the
crite
ria
–
Aut
hent
icat
ion
(car
d re
ader
at h
ome)
/mob
ile s
ecur
ity c
ode
app/
two-
step
ver
ifica
tion
– To
add
ano
ther
leve
l of i
dent
ifica
tion
of th
e us
er
–
Use
of d
rop-
dow
n bo
xes
(or e
quiv
alen
t) –
So
key
logg
ers
cann
ot re
cord
the
key
pres
ses
–
Pro
xy s
erve
r –
To d
iver
t an
atta
ck a
way
from
the
mai
n sy
stem
6
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
9 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– (R
ed) l
aser
is u
sed
– (L
aser
bea
ms)
shi
nes
onto
sur
face
of t
he d
isk
– It
is ro
tate
d (a
t a c
onst
ant s
peed
) to
be re
ad
– S
urfa
ce is
cov
ered
in a
trac
k (th
at s
pira
ls fr
om th
e ce
ntre
) –
Dat
a is
repr
esen
ted
on th
e su
rface
usi
ng p
its a
nd la
nds
– P
its a
nd la
nds
repr
esen
t bin
ary
valu
es
– P
its re
flect
ligh
t bac
k di
ffere
ntly
(to
the
area
in b
etw
een/
land
) –
Opt
ical
dev
ice
can
dete
rmin
e th
e bi
nary
val
ue fr
om th
e lig
ht re
flect
ion
4
9(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cal
cula
tion,
1 m
ark
for c
orre
ct a
nsw
er:
–
1000
× 1
6 –
1600
0/8
–
Ans
wer
is 2
000
byte
s
2
9(c)
Fo
ur fr
om: (
Max
2 fo
r eith
er p
rimar
y or
sec
onda
ry)
–
Prim
ary
RA
M a
nd R
OM
–
Sec
onda
ry H
DD
and
SS
D
–
Prim
ary
is d
irect
ly a
cces
sibl
e by
CP
U
– S
econ
dary
is n
ot d
irect
ly a
cces
sibl
e by
CP
U
–
Prim
ary
is in
tern
al to
com
pute
r –
Sec
onda
ry c
an b
e in
tern
al o
r ext
erna
l to
the
com
pute
r
– P
rimar
y st
ores
boo
t up
inst
ruct
ions
and
can
hol
d da
ta w
hils
t bei
ng p
roce
ssed
–
Sec
onda
ry s
tore
s fil
es/s
oftw
are
–
Prim
ary
has
fast
er a
cces
s sp
eed
– S
econ
dary
has
a s
low
er a
cces
s sp
eed
–
Prim
ary
has
both
vol
atile
and
non
-vol
atile
–
Sec
onda
ry is
non
-vol
atile
4
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
10 o
f 10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10
1 m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect t
ick
Stat
emen
t tr
ue
()
fals
e (
) A
ssem
bly
lang
uage
use
s m
nem
onic
cod
es.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge p
rogr
ams
do n
ot n
eed
a tra
nsla
tor t
o be
exe
cute
d.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
a lo
w-le
vel p
rogr
amm
ing
lang
uage
.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
spe
cific
to th
e co
mpu
ter h
ardw
are.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
mac
hine
cod
e.
Ass
embl
y la
ngua
ge is
ofte
n us
ed to
cre
ate
driv
ers
for h
ardw
are.
6
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 7 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21 Paper 2 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(a)(i) 1 mark per bullet: • At least one array declaration • At least one array has an appropriate name • All arrays with appropriate names Many correct answers, they must be meaningful. These are examples only. Array_2Seater[ ] Array_4Seater[ ] Array_Historic[ ]
3
1(a)(ii) 1 mark per bullet: • Name of variable • Purpose of variable • Name of constant • Purpose of constant Many correct answers, they must be meaningful. These are examples only. Variable NumFlights to store the number of flights in a day Constant FlightCost2Seat30 to store the cost of a 30 minute flight in a 2 seater plane
4
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(b) Any five from: • Prompt for plane • Input plane • Prompt for another input length of flight along with the input. • Attempt at calculation of maximum number of flights in a day • Using correct values for maximum number of flights (from calculation or
otherwise) • Calculation/determination of cost of a single flight for selected plane and
duration • Calculation of income that can be generated for one combination of
plane and flight • Output of total possible income for one combination of plane and flight
with message(s) Algorithm example: OUTPUT "Please Enter Type of Plane" OUTPUT "1: 2 Seater" OUTPUT "2: 4 Seater" OUTPUT "3: Historic" INPUT PlaneType OUTPUT "Please Enter Length of Flight" INPUT FlightLength CASE FlightLength of 30: OUTPUT "Maximum number of flights is 10" 60: OUTPUT "Maximum number of flights is 6" OTHERWISE OUTPUT "Invalid length of flight" ENDCASE CASE PlaneType of 1: Price30 100; Price60 150 2: Price30 120; Price60 200 3: Price30 120; Price60 500 OTHERWISE OUTPUT "Invalid type of plane" ENDCASE CASE FlightLength of 30: OUTPUT "Total Possible Income is ", Price30 * 10 60: OUTPUT "Total Possible Income is ", Price60 * 6 ENDCASE
5
1(c) 1 mark for each correct point related to the inputs for Task 1 • Description of how the program would validate the input • Description/identification of input(s) • Type of validation check • Checking inputs against stored data/maxima/correct data • Dry-running the program • Use of test data • Identification of types of test data • Example(s) of test data
4
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(d) Any four from: • Input timeslot • Check 3 types of plane • Methodology for checking time slot • Identify any planes available • Output plane(s) available • Output if no planes available
4
Question Answer Marks
2 1 mark for each error identified plus suggested correction (the corrected lines must be written in full) Line 4 correct line WHILE Number <= 99 OR Number > 1000 Line 7 correct line Num[Index] = Number Line 9 correct line NEXT (Index) Line 10 correct line PRINT Count
4
Question Answer Marks
3(a) 1 mark per bullet: • Validation checks whether data to be entered is possible/sensible //
computer check • Verification checks that data entered is the data that was intended to be
entered // can be a human check // matches the source
2
3(b) 1 mark for each valid point Either • Double Entry // suitable practical example • the data will be entered twice • compared by the computer or by a human • if a discrepancy is found, the data entry operator is asked to re-enter
the data
Or • Visual Verification // suitable practical example • the data will be compared to the source ‘document’ • compared by a human • if a discrepancy is found, the data is re-entered
2
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 7
Question Answer Marks
3(c) 1 mark for explanation and 1 mark for an expansion • Library routine is a list of instructions // block of code // subroutine • that is used often • which is given a name • and which can be called from other programs • Library routines make writing programs easier and faster as the code is
already written • Library routines make program testing easier as the code has already
been tested and debugged
2
Question Answer Marks
4(a) 1 mark for each correct line Pseudocode description Pseudocode statement
4
4(b) 1 mark per bullet: • Appropriate loop controls • Read from array • Print from array (the last two points can be in one statement) Note reading and printing MUST be within the same loop Example algorithm: Count 0 WHILE Count < 50 DO OUTPUT Name[Count] Count Count + 1 ENDWHILE
3
FOR…TO…NEXT
REPEAT…UNTIL
WHILE…DO…ENDWHILE
CASE…OF…OTHERWISE…ENDCASE
IF…THEN…ELSE…ENDIF
A loop that will iterate at least once.
A conditional statement to deal with many possible
outcomes.
A loop that will iterate a set number of times.
A conditional statement with different outcomes for
true and false.
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 7
Question Answer Marks
5(a)
Flag Count Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4] Temp
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
0 1 Amir Jamal Eve Tara Jamal
1 2 Amir Jamal Eve Tara Jamal
1 3 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
1 4 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 1 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 2 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 3 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 4 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
(1 Mark) (1 Mark) (--------1 Mark--------) (--------1 Mark--------) (1 Mark)
5
5(b) 1 mark per bullet: • Sorting the names • Ascending order / A to Z / lowest to highest / Alphabetic order
2
Question Answer Marks
6(a) 1 mark for any sensible appropriate field name 1 mark for data type, purpose + example data Example 1: Field Name: SPECIESID Data Type: Alphanumeric Purpose: Primary key Example Data: SP06583 Example 2: Field name: NUMBER Data Type: Integer Purpose: To record how many of that species there are at the park Example Data: 30
2
0478/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 7
Question Answer Marks
6(b) Field: Species Classification Diet Legs
Table: LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK
Sort: Ascending/ Descending
Show:
Criteria: “Mammal” “Herbivore” 4
or: (1 Mark) (1 Mark) (1 Mark) (1 Mark) 1 mark per completely correct column.
4
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 8 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22 Paper 2 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
2 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(a)
(i)
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te v
aria
ble
nam
e, 1
mar
k fo
r app
ropr
iate
dat
a ty
pe, 1
mar
k fo
r app
ropr
iate
use
. M
any
corr
ect a
nsw
ers,
they
mus
t be
mea
ning
ful.
Thes
e ar
e ex
ampl
es o
nly.
– HireTotal,
inte
ger,
runn
ing
tota
l of m
oney
take
n (fo
r the
day
)
–
HoursHired,
real
, run
ning
tota
l of h
ours
hire
d fo
r the
day
– Returned,
real
, hou
r and
frac
tion
of h
our w
hen
next
retu
rned
3
1(a)
(ii)
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te c
onst
ant n
ame,
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te v
alue
. M
any
corr
ect a
nsw
ers,
they
mus
t be
mea
ning
ful.
Thes
e ar
e ex
ampl
es o
nly.
– HourPrice, 20.00
–
HalfHourPrice 12.00
2
1(b)
1
mar
k fo
r val
idat
ion
chec
k, a
ll ch
ecks
mus
t be
diffe
rent
, 1 m
ark
for t
he re
ason
and
1 m
ark
for t
he te
st d
ata.
Th
e on
ly in
puts
for t
ask
1 ca
n be
leng
th o
f hire
, mon
ey ta
ken,
tim
e of
hire
and
tim
e of
retu
rn.
Ther
e ar
e m
any
poss
ible
cor
rect
ans
wer
s th
ese
are
exam
ples
onl
y.
Val
idat
ion
chec
k –
rang
e ch
eck
for t
ime
of h
ire
Rea
son
– ca
nnot
be
hire
d be
fore
10:
00 re
turn
ed a
fter 1
7:00
Te
st d
ata
–
12:0
0, 1
9:00
V
alid
atio
n ch
eck
–
type
che
ck fo
r mon
ey ta
ken
Rea
son
– m
ust b
e a
num
eric
val
ue
Test
dat
a
– 20
.00,
bob
6
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
3 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(c)
–
any
loop
for 1
0 bo
ats
(1
mar
k) Fo
ur fr
om:
–
Ini
tialis
atio
n
– ch
eck HoursHired
agai
nst MaxHoursHired
s
tore
the BoatNumber
u
pdat
e MaxHoursHired
if g
reat
er
–
ch
eck
if HoursHired = 0 …
…
if so
add
1 to
NumberBoatsUnused
– up
date
dai
ly to
tals
(for
hou
rs a
nd m
oney
)
–
outp
ut re
port
with
mes
sage
s (in
clud
ing
tota
ls fo
r hou
rs a
nd m
oney
, and
num
ber o
f boa
ts u
nuse
d an
d th
e m
ost u
sed
boat
).
M
ax 4
mar
ksE
xam
ple:
MaxHoursHired
0
TotalHoursHired
0
TotalMoney
0
NumberBoatsUnused
0
FOR BoatNumber
1 to 10
TotalMoney
TotalMoney + Money(BoatNumber)
TotalHoursHired
TotalHoursHired + HoursHired(BoatNumber)
IF HoursHired(BoatNumber) = 0
THEN NumberBoatsUnused
NumberBoatsUnused + 1
ENDIF
IF HoursHired(BoatNumber) > MaxHoursHired
THEN
MostUsed
BoatNumber
MaxHoursHired
HoursHired(BoatNumber)
ENDIF
NEXT BoatNumber
PRINT "Boats were hired for ", TotalHoursHired, " hours"
PRINT "Total amount of money taken was ", TotalMoney
PRINT NumberBoatsUnused, " boats were not used"
Print "Boat number ", MostUsed, " was used most"
5
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
4 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(d)
M
axim
um 4
mar
ks in
tota
l for
que
stio
n pa
rt e.
g.
Expl
anat
ion
(may
incl
ude
refe
renc
e to
pro
gram
sta
tem
ents
)
– c
heck
all
boat
s fo
r
–
retu
rn ti
me
< cu
rren
t tim
e //
curr
ent b
ooki
ng s
lot a
vaila
ble
or re
turn
tim
e >
curr
ent t
ime/
/ cur
rent
boo
king
slo
t not
avai
labl
e
– ke
ep a
runn
ing
tota
l of t
hose
ava
ilabl
e
– di
spla
y nu
mbe
r of b
oats
E
xam
ple:
FOR BoatNumber
1 to 10
loop
to c
heck
for a
ll bo
ats
IF ReturnTime(BoatNumber) <= CurrentTime
chec
k re
turn
tim
e ag
ains
t cur
rent
tim
e THEN BoatsAvailable
BoatsAvailable + 1
keep
a ru
nnin
g to
tal
ENDIF
NEXT BoatNumber
PRINT "Number of boats available ", BoatsAvailable
disp
lay
num
ber o
f boa
ts
4
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
5 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h, th
ere
may
be
othe
r sol
utio
ns, a
war
d fu
ll m
arks
for a
ny w
orki
ng s
olut
ion
any
six
from
:
initi
alis
e to
tal (
outs
ide
loop
)
Inpu
t num
ber o
f num
bers
(out
side
loop
with
val
idat
ion)
Loop
usi
ng in
put v
alue
Inpu
t num
ber (
insi
de lo
op)
U
pdat
e To
tal (
insi
de lo
op)
C
alcu
late
ave
rage
Prin
t ave
rage
and
tota
l (ou
tsid
e lo
op)
Sam
ple
algo
rithm
: INPUT NumberCount
Total
0
FOR Count
1 TO NumberCount
INPUT Number
Total
Total + Number
NEXT
Average
Total/NumberCount
PRINT Total, Average
6
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
6 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t lin
e, m
ax 3
mar
ks.
Dat
a St
ruct
ure
D
escr
iptio
n
Con
stan
t
A c
olle
ctio
n of
rela
ted
data
.
Arr
ay
A
val
ue th
at c
an c
hang
e w
hils
t a
prog
ram
is ru
nnin
g.
Tabl
e
A v
alue
that
nev
er c
hang
es
whi
lst a
pro
gram
is ru
nnin
g.
Var
iabl
e
A s
erie
s of
ele
men
ts o
f the
sa
me
data
type
.
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 2
mar
ks fo
r ide
ntifi
catio
n, 1
mar
k fo
r des
crip
tion,
1 m
ark
for r
easo
n.
Id
entif
icat
ion:
CASE …
… OF … OTHERWISE … (ENDCASE)
or
… OF … (OTHERWISE) … ENDCASE
D
escr
iptio
n:
–
a st
atem
ent t
hat a
llow
s fo
r mul
tiple
sel
ectio
ns //
not
any
of t
he a
bove
Rea
son:
– to
sim
plify
pse
udoc
ode/
mak
e ps
eudo
code
mor
e un
ders
tand
able
etc
.
4
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
7 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
Acc
ept
Rej
ect
Cou
nt
Sack
O
UTP
UT
0 0
0
1
1 50
.4
2
2 50
.3
1
3 49
.1
3
4 50
.3
4
5 50
.0
5
6 49
.5
6
7 50
.2
7
8 50
.3
8
9 50
.5
2
10
50.6
8
2
(1
mar
k)
(1
mar
k)
(1
mar
k)
(1
mar
k)
(1
mar
k)
5
5(b)
–
chan
ge to
Is Count = 50?
–
rem
ove IS Sack > 50.5?
2
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
O
ctob
er/N
ovem
ber
2017
©
UC
LES
201
7 P
age
8 of
8
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(a)
–
1 m
ark
for e
ach
field
sui
tabl
e na
me,
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te d
ata
type
and
app
ropr
iate
dat
a sa
mpl
e
The
follo
win
g ar
e ex
ampl
es th
ere
are
man
y di
ffere
nt c
orre
ct a
nsw
ers.
– E
ngin
e N
umbe
r, te
xt, 2
1012
– C
lass
, tex
t, P
6
– S
ervi
ce D
ate,
dat
e, 4
/3/2
017
6
6(b)
–
Eng
ine
Num
ber /
/ Cor
rect
fiel
d nu
mbe
r 1
6(c)
Fiel
d:
Eng
ine
Num
ber
Cla
ss
Ser
vice
Dat
e
Tabl
e:
TRA
IN
TRA
IN
TRA
IN
Sor
t:
Sho
w:
Crit
eria
:
Like
‘P*’
// Li
ke ‘P
?’
<10/
11/2
016
or:
(1
mar
k)
(1
mar
k)
(1 m
ark)
3
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 7 printed pages.
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23 Paper 2 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(a)(i) 1 mark per bullet: • At least one array declaration • At least one array has an appropriate name • All arrays with appropriate names Many correct answers, they must be meaningful. These are examples only. Array_2Seater[ ] Array_4Seater[ ] Array_Historic[ ]
3
1(a)(ii) 1 mark per bullet: • Name of variable • Purpose of variable • Name of constant • Purpose of constant Many correct answers, they must be meaningful. These are examples only. Variable NumFlights to store the number of flights in a day Constant FlightCost2Seat30 to store the cost of a 30 minute flight in a 2 seater plane
4
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(b) Any five from: • Prompt for plane • Input plane • Prompt for another input length of flight along with the input. • Attempt at calculation of maximum number of flights in a day • Using correct values for maximum number of flights (from calculation or
otherwise) • Calculation/determination of cost of a single flight for selected plane and
duration • Calculation of income that can be generated for one combination of
plane and flight • Output of total possible income for one combination of plane and flight
with message(s) Algorithm example: OUTPUT "Please Enter Type of Plane" OUTPUT "1: 2 Seater" OUTPUT "2: 4 Seater" OUTPUT "3: Historic" INPUT PlaneType OUTPUT "Please Enter Length of Flight" INPUT FlightLength CASE FlightLength of 30: OUTPUT "Maximum number of flights is 10" 60: OUTPUT "Maximum number of flights is 6" OTHERWISE OUTPUT "Invalid length of flight" ENDCASE CASE PlaneType of 1: Price30 100; Price60 150 2: Price30 120; Price60 200 3: Price30 120; Price60 500 OTHERWISE OUTPUT "Invalid type of plane" ENDCASE CASE FlightLength of 30: OUTPUT "Total Possible Income is ", Price30 * 10 60: OUTPUT "Total Possible Income is ", Price60 * 6 ENDCASE
5
1(c) 1 mark for each correct point related to the inputs for Task 1 • Description of how the program would validate the input • Description/identification of input(s) • Type of validation check • Checking inputs against stored data/maxima/correct data • Dry-running the program • Use of test data • Identification of types of test data • Example(s) of test data
4
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(d) Any four from: • Input timeslot • Check 3 types of plane • Methodology for checking time slot • Identify any planes available • Output plane(s) available • Output if no planes available
4
Question Answer Marks
2 1 mark for each error identified plus suggested correction (the corrected lines must be written in full) Line 4 correct line WHILE Number <= 99 OR Number > 1000 Line 7 correct line Num[Index] = Number Line 9 correct line NEXT (Index) Line 10 correct line PRINT Count
4
Question Answer Marks
3(a) 1 mark per bullet: • Validation checks whether data to be entered is possible/sensible //
computer check • Verification checks that data entered is the data that was intended to be
entered // can be a human check // matches the source
2
3(b) 1 mark for each valid point Either • Double Entry // suitable practical example • the data will be entered twice • compared by the computer or by a human • if a discrepancy is found, the data entry operator is asked to re-enter
the data
Or • Visual Verification // suitable practical example • the data will be compared to the source ‘document’ • compared by a human • if a discrepancy is found, the data is re-entered
2
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 7
Question Answer Marks
3(c) 1 mark for explanation and 1 mark for an expansion • Library routine is a list of instructions // block of code // subroutine • that is used often • which is given a name • and which can be called from other programs • Library routines make writing programs easier and faster as the code is
already written • Library routines make program testing easier as the code has already
been tested and debugged
2
Question Answer Marks
4(a) 1 mark for each correct line Pseudocode description Pseudocode statement
4
4(b) 1 mark per bullet: • Appropriate loop controls • Read from array • Print from array (the last two points can be in one statement) Note reading and printing MUST be within the same loop Example algorithm: Count 0 WHILE Count < 50 DO OUTPUT Name[Count] Count Count + 1 ENDWHILE
3
FOR…TO…NEXT
REPEAT…UNTIL
WHILE…DO…ENDWHILE
CASE…OF…OTHERWISE…ENDCASE
IF…THEN…ELSE…ENDIF
A loop that will iterate at least once.
A conditional statement to deal with many possible
outcomes.
A loop that will iterate a set number of times.
A conditional statement with different outcomes for
true and false.
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 7
Question Answer Marks
5(a)
Flag Count Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4] Temp
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
0 1 Amir Jamal Eve Tara Jamal
1 2 Amir Jamal Eve Tara Jamal
1 3 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
1 4 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 1 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 2 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 3 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
0 4 Amir Eve Jamal Tara Jamal
(1 Mark) (1 Mark) (--------1 Mark--------) (--------1 Mark--------) (1 Mark)
5
5(b) 1 mark per bullet: • Sorting the names • Ascending order / A to Z / lowest to highest / Alphabetic order
2
Question Answer Marks
6(a) 1 mark for any sensible appropriate field name 1 mark for data type, purpose + example data Example 1: Field Name: SPECIESID Data Type: Alphanumeric Purpose: Primary key Example Data: SP06583 Example 2: Field name: NUMBER Data Type: Integer Purpose: To record how many of that species there are at the park Example Data: 30
2
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
October/November2017
© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 7
Question Answer Marks
6(b) Field: Species Classification Diet Legs
Table: LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK LIVESTOCK
Sort: Ascending/ Descending
Show:
Criteria: “Mammal” “Herbivore” 4
or: (1 Mark) (1 Mark) (1 Mark) (1 Mark) 1 mark per completely correct column.
4
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (RW) 131976/2© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3469190061*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been receivedat the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/21/PRE/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
A small airfield operates a flying club where people can take a short flight to see if they would like flying lessons. The owner of the airfield has asked you to write a program to organise the flight bookings. The airfield operates three different planes and offers either a 30 minute or a 60 minute flight.
The following table shows the tariff:
Length of Flight 2 Seater Plane 4 Seater Plane Historic Plane
30 minutes $100 $120 $300
60 minutes $150 $200 $500
After each flight, 30 minutes must be allowed for refuelling and safety checks before the next flight can take off. All planes offer both 30 minute and 60 minute flights, but, for the purpose of this activity, they will not be mixed on a given day, e.g. the 2 seater will offer 30 minute flights ONLY on one day and 60 minute flights ONLY on another day.
Write and test a program for the owner of the airfield.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Work out the maximum income.
Assume that the flights take place between 08:00 and 18:00. Write a program that will work out the maximum income that can be generated by each plane in a day for each type of flight. The program should allow you to:
• input the type of plane• input the length of flight• calculate the maximum number of flights in a day• output the total possible income per day for the choice of plane and length of flight
TASK 2 – Record bookings.
Write a program to store bookings for each plane and to allow you to find which planes are available at a given time slot during the day. The program should calculate the actual number of flights taken by each plane in that day.
TASK 3 – Work out income.
Modify TASK 2 so that it will calculate the total amount of money taken in a day for each plane, as well as the overall daily total for all three planes, and output the results.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
*8449719705*
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (CW) 132153/3© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been receivedat the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/22/PRE/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
The owner of a river boat hire company wants to calculate the daily profits from hiring out 10 rowing boats on the river. Boats are numbered 1 to 10. Boats can be hired for use between 10:00 and 17:00 every day.
Write and test a program for the owner.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – calculate the money taken in a day for one boat.
The cost of hiring a boat is $20 for one hour or $12 for half an hour. When a boat is hired the payment is added to the money taken for the day. The running total of hours hired that day is updated and the time when the boat must be returned is stored. At the end of the day the money taken and the total hours hired is output.No boat can be hired before 10:00 or returned after 17:00.
TASK 2 – find the next boat available.
Extend TASK 1 to work for all 10 rowing boats. Use the data stored for each boat to find out how many boats are available for hire at the current time. If no boats are available show the earliest time that a boat will be available for hire.
TASK 3 – calculate the money taken for all the boats at the end of the day.
At the end of the day use the data stored for each boat to calculate the total amount of money taken and the total number of hours boats were hired that day. Find out how many boats were not used that day and which boat was used the most. Provide a report for the owner to show this information.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (LK) 150376© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4142033118*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been receivedat the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/23/PRE/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
A small airfield operates a flying club where people can take a short flight to see if they would like flying lessons. The owner of the airfield has asked you to write a program to organise the flight bookings. The airfield operates three different planes and offers either a 30 minute or a 60 minute flight.
The following table shows the tariff:
Length of Flight 2 Seater Plane 4 Seater Plane Historic Plane
30 minutes $100 $120 $300
60 minutes $150 $200 $500
After each flight, 30 minutes must be allowed for refuelling and safety checks before the next flight can take off. All planes offer both 30 minute and 60 minute flights, but, for the purpose of this activity, they will not be mixed on a given day, e.g. the 2 seater will offer 30 minute flights ONLY on one day and 60 minute flights ONLY on another day.
Write and test a program for the owner of the airfield.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Work out the maximum income.
Assume that the flights take place between 08:00 and 18:00. Write a program that will work out the maximum income that can be generated by each plane in a day for each type of flight. The program should allow you to:
• input the type of plane• input the length of flight• calculate the maximum number of flights in a day• output the total possible income per day for the choice of plane and length of flight
TASK 2 – Record bookings.
Write a program to store bookings for each plane and to allow you to find which planes are available at a given time slot during the day. The program should calculate the actual number of flights taken by each plane in that day.
TASK 3 – Work out income.
Modify TASK 2 so that it will calculate the total amount of money taken in a day for each plane, as well as the overall daily total for all three planes, and output the results.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NH/SW) 134256/4© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
*1320964509*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/11Paper 1 Theory October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
1 A washing machine has a small display screen built into it.
One use of the display screen is to show an error code when a problem has occurred with a washing cycle.
(a) State whether the display screen is an input, output or storage device.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The display screen shows a hexadecimal error code:
E04 This error code means that the water will not empty out of the washing machine.
Convert this error code to binary.
[3]
(c) State why hexadecimal is used to display the error code.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Identify three sensors that could be used in the washing machine.
State what each sensor could be used for.
Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Sensor 2 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Sensor 3 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
3
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2 Data files are stored in different file formats.
Complete the table by providing a suitable file format for each file type. The first one has been done for you.
File type File format
Pictures .JPEG
Text
Sound
Video
[3]
3 (a) An example of a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is:
http://www.cie.org.uk/index.htmPart 1 Part 2 Part 3
Identify the three parts that make up this URL.
Part 1 ........................................................................................................................................
Part 2 ........................................................................................................................................
Part 3 ........................................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) Describe what is meant by an Internet Protocol (IP) address.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
4
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
4 Six components of a computer system and six descriptions are shown.
Draw a line to match each component with the most suitable description.
Component Description
Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)
Buses
Control Unit(CU)
Immediate Access Store (IAS)
Input/Output
Registers
Used to connect together the internal components
of the CPU.
Used to carry out calculations on data.
Used to temporarily hold data and instructions during processing.
Used to allow interaction with the computer.
Used to hold data and instructions before they
are processed.
Used to manage the flow of data through the CPU.
[5]
5
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
5 (a) Draw a logic circuit for the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 AND B is 1) OR (A is NOT 1 AND C is 1))
A
B X
C
[4]
6
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(b) Draw the symbol for an XOR gate and explain the function of this logic gate.
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
6 Describe the operation of a 2D scanner and a 3D scanner.
2D .....................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
3D .....................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
7
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
7 Six statements about firewalls are shown.
Tick (3) to show whether each statement is true or false.
Statement true(3)
false(3)
Firewalls can monitor incoming and outgoing traffic.
Firewalls operate by checking traffic against a set of rules.
Firewalls cannot block access to a certain website.
Firewalls can be software and hardware.
Firewalls can act as intermediary servers.
Firewalls can block unauthorised traffic.
[6]
8
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
8 (a) Data is valuable. It needs to be kept secure and it can easily be damaged.
Give three different ways that data can be accidentally damaged.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol can be used to securely transmit data in online banking.
State three other different applications that use SSL.
Application 1 .............................................................................................................................
Application 2 .............................................................................................................................
Application 3 ............................................................................................................................. [3]
9
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(c) Online banking is increasing in popularity.
Online banking can be a risk as it can raise a number of security issues. SSL can be used as a security method to make online banking safer.
Identify and describe three other security methods that could be used to make online banking safer.
Security method 1 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Security method 2 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Security method 3 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
10
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
9 (a) Optical storage media can be used to store data.
Describe how the data is read from a Compact Disc (CD).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Kamil wants to store a 16-bit colour image file. The image size is 1000 pixels.
Calculate the size of the file.
Give your answer in bytes. Show your working.
Working .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Answer ............................... bytes [2]
(c) Describe the differences between primary and secondary storage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
11
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
10 Six statements about assembly language are shown.
Tick (3) whether the statement is true or false.
Statement true(3)
false(3)
Assembly language uses mnemonic codes.
Assembly language programs do not need a translator to be executed.
Assembly language is a low-level programming language.
Assembly language is specific to the computer hardware.
Assembly language is machine code.
Assembly language is often used to create drivers for hardware.
[6]
12
0478/11/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (NH/SW) 138025/2© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
*0049796571*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12Paper 1 Theory October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
1 A robot arm in a factory is programmed to move products.
The binary instructions to operate the robot arm are:
Operation Binary Instruction
UP 1 1 1 1
DOWN 0 0 0 1
LEFT 1 0 0 1
RIGHT 0 1 1 0
OPEN 1 1 0 0
CLOSE 0 0 1 1
The instructions are entered as hexadecimal values.
An operator enters the values:
9 1 C 3 F
Convert the values and write down the operation (e.g. RIGHT) carried out by the robot arm.
9 .............................................................................
1 .............................................................................
C .............................................................................
3 .............................................................................
F ............................................................................. [5]
3
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2 Storage devices and storage media can be categorised as primary, secondary or off-line.
Write primary, secondary or off-line next to each storage device or medium to indicate its most suitable category.
HDD ....................................................................................................................................
RAM ....................................................................................................................................
ROM ....................................................................................................................................
CD-ROM ....................................................................................................................................
SSD ....................................................................................................................................
DVD-RAM ....................................................................................................................................[6]
3 (a) Explain the differences between the binary number system and the denary number system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain the process of converting the binary number 1010 into a denary number.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
4
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
4 A file server is used as a central data store for a network of computers.
Rory sends data from his computer to a file server that is approximately 100 metres away.
It is important that the data is transmitted accurately. Rory needs to be able to read data from and write data to the file server at the same time.
(a) (i) Use ticks (3) to identify the most suitable data transmission methods for this application.
Method 1 Tick (3)
Method 2 Tick (3)
Serial Simplex
Parallel Half-duplex
Duplex
[2]
(ii) Explain why your answer to part (a)(i) is the most suitable data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
5
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(b) Identify and describe two methods of error checking that can be used to make sure that the data stored after transmission is accurate.
Method 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Method 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[6]
6
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
5 Raj is using the Internet to do some online shopping. He visits a website that tells him that it uses cookies.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term cookies.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Give two examples of the use of cookies.
Example 1 .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Example 2 .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
7
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
6 Selma writes the following four answers in her Computer Science examination.
State which computer terms she is describing.
“It is a signal. When the signal is received it tells the operating system that an event has occurred.”
Selma is describing ..........................................................................................................................
“It takes source code written in a high level language and translates it into machine code. It translates the whole of the source code at once.”
Selma is describing ..........................................................................................................................
“The part of the central processing unit (CPU) that carries out calculations.”
Selma is describing ..........................................................................................................................
“When data is transmitted, if an error is detected in the data received a signal is sent to ask for the data to be retransmitted. This continues until the data received is correct.”
Selma is describing ..........................................................................................................................[4]
8
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
7 Draw a logic circuit to represent the logic statement:
X = 1 if (A is NOT 1 AND B is 1) AND (A is NOT 1 AND C is NOT 1) OR (B is 1 AND C is 1)
A
B X
C
[7]
9
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
8 (a) A computer has 2048 MB of RAM.
How many GB of RAM does the computer have?
Show your working.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
..............................GB [2]
(b) Describe one item that is stored in RAM.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain three ways that RAM is different to ROM.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[3]
10
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
9 Anna has a farm that grows fruit.
She has a system that monitors the conditions for growing the fruit.
Sensors are used in this system.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term sensor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State two sensors that could be used in this system and describe how they could be used.
Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Sensor 2 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
11
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
10 (a) Describe what is meant by Transport Layer Security (TLS).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Name three different applications of TLS.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]
12
0478/12/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
11 Complete the paragraphs choosing the correct five terms from the list. Each term can only be used once:
• Ethics• Freeware• Free Software• Hacking• Malware• Plagiarism• Shareware• Virus
Taking another person’s work from the Internet and claiming it as your own is called
............................................. . It is possible to protect your work online with copyright.
One product that people may want to protect is software. ............................................. does allow
a person to share, copy and change software freely, but ............................................. does not
allow a person to do this legally. Software that has a licence allowing free use for a trial period
is called ............................................ . The name given to this area of Computer Science is
............................................. .[5]
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (CE/SW) 152857© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
*3002984728*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/13Paper 1 Theory October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
1 A washing machine has a small display screen built into it.
One use of the display screen is to show an error code when a problem has occurred with a washing cycle.
(a) State whether the display screen is an input, output or storage device.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The display screen shows a hexadecimal error code:
E04 This error code means that the water will not empty out of the washing machine.
Convert this error code to binary.
[3]
(c) State why hexadecimal is used to display the error code.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Identify three sensors that could be used in the washing machine.
State what each sensor could be used for.
Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Sensor 2 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Sensor 3 ...................................................................................................................................
Use ...........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
3
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2 Data files are stored in different file formats.
Complete the table by providing a suitable file format for each file type. The first one has been done for you.
File type File format
Pictures .JPEG
Text
Sound
Video
[3]
3 (a) An example of a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is:
http://www.cie.org.uk/index.htmPart 1 Part 2 Part 3
Identify the three parts that make up this URL.
Part 1 ........................................................................................................................................
Part 2 ........................................................................................................................................
Part 3 ........................................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) Describe what is meant by an Internet Protocol (IP) address.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
4
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
4 Six components of a computer system and six descriptions are shown.
Draw a line to match each component with the most suitable description.
Component Description
Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)
Buses
Control Unit(CU)
Immediate Access Store (IAS)
Input/Output
Registers
Used to connect together the internal components
of the CPU.
Used to carry out calculations on data.
Used to temporarily hold data and instructions during processing.
Used to allow interaction with the computer.
Used to hold data and instructions before they
are processed.
Used to manage the flow of data through the CPU.
[5]
5
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
5 (a) Draw a logic circuit for the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 AND B is 1) OR (A is NOT 1 AND C is 1))
A
B X
C
[4]
6
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(b) Draw the symbol for an XOR gate and explain the function of this logic gate.
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
6 Describe the operation of a 2D scanner and a 3D scanner.
2D .....................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
3D .....................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
7
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
7 Six statements about firewalls are shown.
Tick (3) to show whether each statement is true or false.
Statement true(3)
false(3)
Firewalls can monitor incoming and outgoing traffic.
Firewalls operate by checking traffic against a set of rules.
Firewalls cannot block access to a certain website.
Firewalls can be software and hardware.
Firewalls can act as intermediary servers.
Firewalls can block unauthorised traffic.
[6]
8
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
8 (a) Data is valuable. It needs to be kept secure and it can easily be damaged.
Give three different ways that data can be accidentally damaged.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol can be used to securely transmit data in online banking.
State three other different applications that use SSL.
Application 1 .............................................................................................................................
Application 2 .............................................................................................................................
Application 3 ............................................................................................................................. [3]
9
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(c) Online banking is increasing in popularity.
Online banking can be a risk as it can raise a number of security issues. SSL can be used as a security method to make online banking safer.
Identify and describe three other security methods that could be used to make online banking safer.
Security method 1 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Security method 2 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Security method 3 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
10
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
9 (a) Optical storage media can be used to store data.
Describe how the data is read from a Compact Disc (CD).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Kamil wants to store a 16-bit colour image file. The image size is 1000 pixels.
Calculate the size of the file.
Give your answer in bytes. Show your working.
Working .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Answer ............................... bytes [2]
(c) Describe the differences between primary and secondary storage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
11
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
10 Six statements about assembly language are shown.
Tick (3) whether the statement is true or false.
Statement true(3)
false(3)
Assembly language uses mnemonic codes.
Assembly language programs do not need a translator to be executed.
Assembly language is a low-level programming language.
Assembly language is specific to the computer hardware.
Assembly language is machine code.
Assembly language is often used to create drivers for hardware.
[6]
12
0478/13/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
*9777315973*
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (CW/SW) 131978/2© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
A small airfield operates a flying club where people can take a short flight to see if they would like flying lessons. The owner of the airfield has asked you to write a program to organise the flight bookings. The airfield operates three different planes and offers either a 30 minute or a 60 minute flight.
The following table shows the tariff:
Length of Flight 2 Seater Plane 4 Seater Plane Historic Plane30 minutes $100 $120 $30060 minutes $150 $200 $500
After each flight, 30 minutes must be allowed for refuelling and safety checks before the next flight can take off. All planes offer both 30 minute and 60 minute flights, but, for the purpose of this activity, they will not be mixed on a given day, e.g. the 2 seater will offer 30 minute flights ONLY on one day and 60 minute flights ONLY on another day.
Write and test a program for the owner of the airfield.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Work out the maximum income.Assume that the flights take place between 08:00 and 18:00. Write a program that will work out the maximum income that can be generated by each plane in a day for each type of flight. The program should allow you to:
• input the type of plane• input the length of flight• calculate the maximum number of flights in a day• output the total possible income per day for the choice of plane and length of flight
TASK 2 – Record bookings.Write a program to store bookings for each plane and to allow you to find which planes are available at a given time slot during the day. The program should calculate the actual number of flights taken by each plane in that day.
TASK 3 – Work out income.Modify TASK 2 so that it will calculate the total amount of money taken in a day for each plane, as well as the overall daily total for all three planes, and output the results.
3
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) Declare suitable arrays for each of the planes to store time slots booked.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Name one variable and one constant you used for Task 1 and state the purpose of each one.
Variable .............................................................................................................................
Purpose .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Constant ............................................................................................................................
Purpose .............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
4
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(b) Write an algorithm to complete Task 1, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
5
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
6
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(c) Describe how you could validate and test the inputs for Task 1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Explain how your program checks and displays whether any of the planes are available at a given time of the day (Task 2). Any programming statements used must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
7
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Section B
2 This section of program code asks for 80 numbers between 100 and 1000 to be entered. It checks that the numbers are in the correct range, and stores them in an array. It counts how many of the numbers are larger than 500 and then outputs the result when the program is finished.
1 Count = 0 2 FOR Index = 1 TO 80 3 INPUT 'Enter a number between 100 and 1000', Number 4 WHILE Number = 99 AND Number = 1001 5 INPUT 'This is incorrect, please try again', Number 6 ENDWHILE 7 Num[80] = Number 8 IF Number > 500 THEN Count = Count + 1 9 UNTIL Index = 80 10 PRINT Index 11 PRINT ' numbers were larger than 500'
There are four lines of code that contain errors.
State the line number for each error and write the correct code for that line.
Error 1 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 2 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 3 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 4 Line Number .............................
Correct Code .................................................................................................................................... [4]
8
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
3 (a) Explain the difference between a validation check and a verification check.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe, using an example, how data could be verified on data entry.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain what is meant by the term library routine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
4 (a) Four pseudocode descriptions and five pseudocode statements are shown. Draw one line to link each pseudocode description to the correct pseudocode statement. Not all pseudocode statements will be used.
Pseudocode description Pseudocode statement
A loop that will iterate at least
once.
A conditional statement to deal with many possible outcomes.
A loop that will iterate a set
number of times.
A conditional statement with different outcomes for true
and false.
FOR…TO…NEXT
IF…THEN…ELSE…ENDIF
WHILE…DO…ENDWHILE
CASE…OF…OTHERWISE…ENDCASE
REPEAT…UNTIL
[4]
9
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(b) Write an algorithm in pseudocode, using a single loop, to print 50 names that have been stored in an array.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
10
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
5 The flowchart below represents a program routine.
Flag 0Count 1
START
END
Is Name[Count]> Name[Count + 1]?
Is Count= 4?
Is Flag= 0?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Temp Name[Count]
Name[Count] Name[Count + 1]
Name[Count + 1] Temp
Flag 1
Count Count + 1
11
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(a) The array used in the flowchart contains the following data:
Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4]
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
Complete the trace table using the data given in the array.
Flag Count Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4] Temp
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
[5]
(b) Describe what the algorithm represented by the flowchart is doing.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Question 6 begins on Page 12.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
12
0478/21/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
6 A wildlife park has a database table, called LIVESTOCK, to classify and record its animal species. Part of the database table is shown.
Species Classification Diet Legs
Giraffe Mammal Herbivore 4
Elephant Mammal Herbivore 4
Crocodile Reptile Carnivore 4
Ostrich Bird Omnivore 2
Gorilla Mammal Herbivore 2
Bear Mammal Omnivore 4
Rhinoceros Mammal Herbivore 4
Hippopotamus Mammal Herbivore 4
Flamingo Bird Omnivore 2
Lion Mammal Carnivore 4
Turtle Reptile Omnivore 4
Penguin Bird Carnivore 2
(a) Suggest another appropriate field that could be added to this database by stating its name and data type. State its purpose and give an example of the data it could contain.
Field name ................................................................................................................................
Data Type .................................................................................................................................
Purpose ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Example of data ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Use the query-by-example grid below to provide a list of all four legged mammals that are herbivores, sorted alphabetically by species, with only the species displayed.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[4]
*3781982019*
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (CW/FD) 132152/3© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
The owner of a river boat hire company wants to calculate the daily profits from hiring out 10 rowing boats on the river. Boats are numbered 1 to 10. Boats can be hired for use between 10:00 and 17:00 every day.
Write and test a program for the owner.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data. • Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably. • All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – calculate the money taken in a day for one boat.
The cost of hiring a boat is $20 for one hour or $12 for half an hour. When a boat is hired the payment is added to the money taken for the day. The running total of hours hired that day is updated and the time when the boat must be returned is stored. At the end of the day the money taken and the total hours hired is output.No boat can be hired before 10:00 or returned after 17:00.
TASK 2 – find the next boat available.
Extend TASK 1 to work for all 10 rowing boats. Use the data stored for each boat to find out how many boats are available for hire at the current time. If no boats are available show the earliest time that a boat will be available for hire.
TASK 3 – calculate the money taken for all the boats at the end of the day.
At the end of the day use the data stored for each boat to calculate the total amount of money taken and the total number of hours boats were hired that day. Find out how many boats were not used that day and which boat was used the most. Provide a report for the owner to show this information.
3
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) For one variable that you have used to record the information about a single boat in Task 1, state the name, data type and its use.
Variable name ...................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State one constant and its value that you could have used for Task 1.
Constant name ..................................................................................................................
Value .................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Give two different validation checks you could have used for data entry in Task 1. For each check explain why it could be used and provide a set of data for testing.
Validation check 1 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason for choice .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Set of test data .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Validation check 2 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason for choice .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Set of test data .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[6]
4
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(c) Write an algorithm to complete Task 3, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart. You may assume Task 2 has been completed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
5
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(d) Explain how your program finds out how many boats are available for hire (Task 2). Any programming statements used must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
6
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Section B
2 Write an algorithm using either pseudocode or a flowchart, to:
• input a positive integer • use this value to set up how many other numbers are to be input • input these numbers • calculate and output the total and the average of these numbers.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[6]
7
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
3 The following diagram shows four data structures and four descriptions.
Draw a line to connect each data structure to the correct description.
Data structure Description
Constant
A collection of related data
Array
A value that can change whilst a program is running
Table
A value that never changes whilst a program is running
Variable
A series of elements of the same data type
[3]
4 IF … THEN … ELSE … ENDIF is one type of conditional statement used when writing pseudocode.
Identify and describe another type of conditional statement that you could use when writing pseudocode. Give a reason why you would use this type of conditional statement.
Conditional statement ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Description .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reason .............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
8
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
5 (a) This flowchart checks a batch of 10 rice sacks for weight. Sacks should weigh 50 kilograms each. Sacks weighing over 50.5 kilograms or less than 49.5 kilograms are rejected. The number of sacks accepted and the number of sacks rejected is output.
START
AcceptRejectCount
Is Count= 10?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
INPUTSack
Count Count + 1
Accept + 1
000
END
Accept
Reject Reject + 1
OUTPUTAccept,Reject
Is Sack< 49.5?
Is Sack> 50.5?
9
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Complete the trace table for the input data:
50.4, 50.3, 49.1, 50.3, 50.0, 49.5, 50.2, 50.3, 50.5, 50.6
Accept Reject Count Sack OUTPUT
[5]
(b) The size of the batch has increased to 50 sacks. It has been decided to only reject sacks that are underweight.
State the changes that need to be made to the flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
10
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
6 A database table, TRAIN, is to be set up for a railway company to keep a record of the engines available for use. Each engine has a unique number made up of 5 digits, nnnnn. The engines are classified as freight (F) or passenger (P) together with a power classification that is a whole number between 0 and 9, for example F8. The railway company keeps a record of the date of the last service for each engine.
(a) Identify the three fields required for the database. Give each field a suitable name and data type. Provide a sample of data that you could expect to see in the field.
Field 1 Name ............................................................................................................................
Data type ..................................................................................................................................
Data sample .............................................................................................................................
Field 2 Name ............................................................................................................................
Data type ..................................................................................................................................
Data sample .............................................................................................................................
Field 3 Name ............................................................................................................................
Data type ..................................................................................................................................
Data sample .........................................................................................................................[6]
(b) State the field that you should choose as the primary key.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Using the query-by-example grid below, write a query to identify all passenger engines that have not been serviced in the past 12 months. Only display the engine numbers.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[3]
11
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
BLANK PAGE
12
0478/22/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
*0495102828*
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (LK) 150377© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming October/November 2017 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
A small airfield operates a flying club where people can take a short flight to see if they would like flying lessons. The owner of the airfield has asked you to write a program to organise the flight bookings. The airfield operates three different planes and offers either a 30 minute or a 60 minute flight.
The following table shows the tariff:
Length of Flight 2 Seater Plane 4 Seater Plane Historic Plane30 minutes $100 $120 $30060 minutes $150 $200 $500
After each flight, 30 minutes must be allowed for refuelling and safety checks before the next flight can take off. All planes offer both 30 minute and 60 minute flights, but, for the purpose of this activity, they will not be mixed on a given day, e.g. the 2 seater will offer 30 minute flights ONLY on one day and 60 minute flights ONLY on another day.
Write and test a program for the owner of the airfield.
• Your program must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Work out the maximum income.Assume that the flights take place between 08:00 and 18:00. Write a program that will work out the maximum income that can be generated by each plane in a day for each type of flight. The program should allow you to:
• input the type of plane• input the length of flight• calculate the maximum number of flights in a day• output the total possible income per day for the choice of plane and length of flight
TASK 2 – Record bookings.Write a program to store bookings for each plane and to allow you to find which planes are available at a given time slot during the day. The program should calculate the actual number of flights taken by each plane in that day.
TASK 3 – Work out income.Modify TASK 2 so that it will calculate the total amount of money taken in a day for each plane, as well as the overall daily total for all three planes, and output the results.
3
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) Declare suitable arrays for each of the planes to store time slots booked.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Name one variable and one constant you used for Task 1 and state the purpose of each one.
Variable .............................................................................................................................
Purpose .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Constant ............................................................................................................................
Purpose .............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
4
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(b) Write an algorithm to complete Task 1, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
5
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
6
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
(c) Describe how you could validate and test the inputs for Task 1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Explain how your program checks and displays whether any of the planes are available at a given time of the day (Task 2). Any programming statements used must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
7
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
Section B
2 This section of program code asks for 80 numbers between 100 and 1000 to be entered. It checks that the numbers are in the correct range, and stores them in an array. It counts how many of the numbers are larger than 500 and then outputs the result when the program is finished.
1 Count = 0 2 FOR Index = 1 TO 80 3 INPUT 'Enter a number between 100 and 1000', Number 4 WHILE Number = 99 AND Number = 1001 5 INPUT 'This is incorrect, please try again', Number 6 ENDWHILE 7 Num[80] = Number 8 IF Number > 500 THEN Count = Count + 1 9 UNTIL Index = 80 10 PRINT Index 11 PRINT ' numbers were larger than 500'
There are four lines of code that contain errors.
State the line number for each error and write the correct code for that line.
Error 1 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 2 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 3 Line Number .............................
Correct Code ....................................................................................................................................
Error 4 Line Number .............................
Correct Code .................................................................................................................................... [4]
8
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
3 (a) Explain the difference between a validation check and a verification check.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe, using an example, how data could be verified on data entry.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain what is meant by the term library routine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
4 (a) Four pseudocode descriptions and five pseudocode statements are shown. Draw one line to link each pseudocode description to the correct pseudocode statement. Not all pseudocode statements will be used.
Pseudocode description Pseudocode statement
A loop that will iterate at least
once.
A conditional statement to deal with many possible outcomes.
A loop that will iterate a set
number of times.
A conditional statement with different outcomes for true
and false.
FOR…TO…NEXT
IF…THEN…ELSE…ENDIF
WHILE…DO…ENDWHILE
CASE…OF…OTHERWISE…ENDCASE
REPEAT…UNTIL
[4]
9
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(b) Write an algorithm in pseudocode, using a single loop, to print 50 names that have been stored in an array.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
10
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
5 The flowchart below represents a program routine.
Flag 0Count 1
START
END
Is Name[Count]> Name[Count + 1]?
Is Count= 4?
Is Flag= 0?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Temp Name[Count]
Name[Count] Name[Count + 1]
Name[Count + 1] Temp
Flag 1
Count Count + 1
11
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
(a) The array used in the flowchart contains the following data:
Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4]
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
Complete the trace table using the data given in the array.
Flag Count Name[1] Name[2] Name[3] Name[4] Temp
Jamal Amir Eve Tara
[5]
(b) Describe what the algorithm represented by the flowchart is doing.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Question 6 begins on Page 12.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
12
0478/23/O/N/17© UCLES 2017
6 A wildlife park has a database table, called LIVESTOCK, to classify and record its animal species. Part of the database table is shown.
Species Classification Diet Legs
Giraffe Mammal Herbivore 4
Elephant Mammal Herbivore 4
Crocodile Reptile Carnivore 4
Ostrich Bird Omnivore 2
Gorilla Mammal Herbivore 2
Bear Mammal Omnivore 4
Rhinoceros Mammal Herbivore 4
Hippopotamus Mammal Herbivore 4
Flamingo Bird Omnivore 2
Lion Mammal Carnivore 4
Turtle Reptile Omnivore 4
Penguin Bird Carnivore 2
(a) Suggest another appropriate field that could be added to this database by stating its name and data type. State its purpose and give an example of the data it could contain.
Field name ................................................................................................................................
Data Type .................................................................................................................................
Purpose ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Example of data ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Use the query-by-example grid below to provide a list of all four legged mammals that are herbivores, sorted alphabetically by species, with only the species displayed.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[4]
Grade thresholds – March 2018
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email [email protected]
Cambridge IGCSE Computer Science (0478) Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0478 (Computer Science) in the March 2018 examination.
minimum raw mark required for grade:
maximum raw
mark available
A B C D E F G
Component 12 75 53 45 37 32 28 23 18
Component 22 50 36 29 22 18 14 11 8 Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component. The maximum total mark for this syllabus, after weighting has been applied, is 125. The overall thresholds for the different grades were set as follows.
Option Combination of Components A* A B C D E F G
AY 12, 22 104 89 74 59 50 42 34 26
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 11 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12 Paper 1 March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
11
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
11
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h ‘T
ype
of s
oftw
are’
if c
orre
ct li
nes
are
atta
ched
to it
.
2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2(a)
A
ny th
ree
from
: S
cans
file
s fo
r viru
ses
// de
tect
s/id
entif
ies
a vi
rus
Can
con
stan
tly ru
n in
bac
kgro
und
Can
run
a sc
hedu
led
scan
C
an a
utom
atic
ally
upd
atin
g vi
rus
defin
ition
s C
an q
uara
ntin
e a
viru
s C
an d
elet
e a
viru
s C
ompl
etes
heu
ristic
che
ckin
g
Not
ifies
use
r of a
pos
sibl
e vi
rus
3
Des
crip
tion
Ty
pe o
f sof
twar
e
Free
to d
ownl
oad
Cod
e ca
n be
mod
ified
an
d re
dist
ribut
ed
Sub
ject
to c
opyr
ight
le
gisl
atio
n
Free
sof
twar
e
Free
war
e
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
: U
se a
fire
wal
l U
se o
f a p
roxy
ser
ver
Do
not u
se /
dow
nloa
d so
ftwar
e / f
iles
from
unk
now
n so
urce
s
Do
not s
hare
ext
erna
l sto
rage
dev
ices
/ U
SB
pen
s D
o no
t ope
n / t
ake
care
whe
n op
enin
g at
tach
men
ts /
link
Do
not c
onne
ct c
ompu
ter t
o ne
twor
k / u
se a
s st
and-
alon
e co
mpu
ter
Lim
iting
acc
ess
to th
e co
mpu
ter
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
B
yte
3 / 1
0110
100
1
3(b)
O
dd p
arity
use
d C
ount
ed /
adde
d th
e nu
mbe
r 1’s
// M
ost B
ytes
hav
e an
odd
num
ber o
f 1’s
B
yte
3 ha
s an
eve
n nu
mbe
r of 1
’s //
Byt
e 3
didn
’t fo
llow
odd
par
ity
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 A
ny s
ix fr
om:
Sen
sor(
s) s
end
data
/sig
nals
to th
e m
icro
proc
esso
r A
nalo
gue
sign
al/d
ata
from
sen
sor i
s co
nver
ted
to d
igita
l (us
ing
AD
C)
Mic
ropr
oces
sor c
ompa
res
data
val
ue a
gain
st s
et b
ound
arie
s / p
re-s
et d
ata
If va
lue
betw
een
21 a
nd 2
4
no
actio
n ta
ken
If va
lue
> 24 °C
/ si
gnal
is s
ent f
rom
mic
ropr
oces
sor
to
turn
con
ditio
ning
uni
t ON
//Set
to c
old
If va
lue
is <
21
°C s
igna
l is
sent
from
mic
ropr
oces
sor
to
turn
con
ditio
ning
uni
t ON
//Set
to w
arm
P
roce
ss is
repe
ated
for a
con
tinuo
us o
pera
tion
6
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
O
ne m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect H
exad
ecim
al v
alue
C
4 10
FE
09
3
5(b)
A
ny tw
o fro
m:
Eas
ier /
sim
pler
to re
mem
ber /
writ
e do
wn
// qu
icke
r to
trans
crib
e Le
ss li
kely
to m
ake
erro
r Le
ss d
igits
to u
se
2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6 1
mar
k fo
r sui
tabl
e ex
ampl
e an
d 1
mar
k fo
r sui
tabl
e as
soci
ated
use
. P
rimar
y R
AM
s
tore
s O
S w
hen
runn
ing
/ dat
a cu
rren
tly in
use
/ in
stru
ctio
ns c
urre
ntly
in u
se
R
OM
s
tore
s bo
ot in
stru
ctio
ns /
BIO
S
C
ache
s
tore
s fre
quen
tly u
sed
inst
ruct
ions
S
econ
dary
H
DD
/ S
SD
stor
es fi
les
/ app
licat
ions
(by
exam
ple)
O
fflin
e C
D/D
VD
/Blu
-ray
/Fla
sh M
emor
y/U
SB
stic
k/R
emov
able
HD
D/R
emov
able
SS
D
s
tore
s fil
es /
appl
icat
ions
(by
exam
ple)
6
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7(a)
4
mar
ks fo
r 8 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
3 m
arks
for 6
cor
rect
out
puts
2
mar
ks fo
r 4 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
1 m
ark
for 2
cor
rect
out
puts
A
B
C
X
0 0
0 1
0 0
1 0
0 1
0 1
0 1
1 1
1 0
0 0
1 0
1 1
1 1
0 1
1 1
1 1
4
7(b)
1
mar
k pe
r gat
e in
cor
rect
loca
tion
6
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7(c)
4
mar
ks fo
r 8 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
3 m
arks
for 6
cor
rect
out
puts
2
mar
ks fo
r 4 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
1 m
ark
for 2
cor
rect
out
puts
A
B
C
X
0 0
0 0
0 0
1 0
0 1
0 1
0 1
1 1
1 0
0 0
1 0
1 0
1 1
0 0
1 1
1 0
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
Des
crip
tions
M
etho
d
Ser
ial
Par
alle
l
Mul
tiple
bits
are
sen
t and
rece
ived
at
the
sam
e tim
e.
[1]
Bits
are
sen
t one
at a
tim
e in
a s
ingl
e di
rect
ion.
[1
]
Bits
are
sen
t usi
ng a
sin
gle
wire
. Dat
a ca
n be
sen
t or r
ecei
ved,
but
not
at t
he
sam
e tim
e.
[1]
3
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(b)
Des
crip
tions
Ty
pe
S
impl
ex
Hal
f-dup
lex
Dup
lex
Mul
tiple
bits
are
sen
t and
rece
ived
at
the
sam
e tim
e.
[1
]
Bits
are
sen
t one
at a
tim
e in
a s
ingl
e di
rect
ion.
[1]
Bits
are
sen
t usi
ng a
sin
gle
wire
. Dat
a ca
n be
sen
t or r
ecei
ved,
but
not
at t
he
sam
e tim
e.
[1
]
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9 M
ax 3
– 1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
ans
wer
and
2 m
arks
for c
orre
ct c
alcu
latio
ns.
Any
two
from
: 16
000
× 32
51
2000
/ 10
24
Or
1600
0 ×
8
1280
00 ×
32
4096
000
/ 8
5120
00 /
1024
C
orre
ct a
nsw
er:
500
kB
3
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
10 o
f 11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(a
)(i)
1001
0 1
10(a
)(ii)
11
1100
01
1
10(b
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
The
prog
ram
is s
tore
d on
a s
econ
dary
sto
rage
dev
ice
Dat
a an
d in
stru
ctio
ns a
re m
oved
to m
emor
y / R
AM
D
ata
and
inst
ruct
ions
are
sto
red
in th
e sa
me
mem
ory
/ RA
M
Dat
a an
d in
stru
ctio
ns a
re m
oved
to re
gist
ers
to b
e ex
ecut
ed
Inst
ruct
ions
are
fetc
hed
one
at a
tim
e
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
11(a
) S
mal
ler f
ile s
ize
redu
ces
dow
nloa
d / d
ispl
ay ti
me
// re
duce
s up
load
tim
e
1
11(b
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
A c
ompr
essi
on a
lgor
ithm
is u
sed
Per
man
ently
del
etin
g so
me
data
// fi
le c
anno
t be
rest
ored
to o
rigin
al
Col
our d
epth
/ pa
lette
can
be
redu
ced
Res
olut
ion
can
be re
duce
d //
num
ber o
f pix
els
can
be re
duce
d Le
ss b
its w
ill b
e re
quire
d fo
r eac
h pi
xel /
col
our
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
12(a
) Q
uick
er to
sca
n
rath
er th
an ty
pe in
to a
sys
tem
Fe
wer
err
ors
n
o hu
man
inpu
t
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
11 o
f 11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
12(b
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
Use
s a
barc
ode
read
er /
scan
ner
Rea
der s
hine
s lig
ht /
red
lase
r at b
arco
de
Whi
te li
nes
refle
ct (m
ore)
ligh
t S
enso
rs /
phot
oele
ctric
cel
ls d
etec
t lig
ht re
flect
ed b
ack
Diff
eren
t ref
lect
ions
/ ba
rs w
ill c
onve
rt to
diff
eren
t bin
ary
valu
es
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
13
Any
four
from
•
(Pro
vide
s an
) int
erfa
ce
• Lo
ads
/ ope
ns /
inst
alls
/ cl
oses
sof
twar
e •
Man
ages
the
hard
war
e //
man
ages
per
iphe
rals
// s
pool
ing
• M
anag
es th
e tra
nsfe
r of p
rogr
ams
into
and
out
of m
emor
y •
Div
ides
pro
cess
ing
time
// pr
oces
sor m
anag
emen
t •
Man
ages
file
han
dlin
g •
Man
ages
err
or h
andl
ing
/ int
erru
pts
• M
anag
es s
ecur
ity s
oftw
are
• M
anag
es u
tility
sof
twar
e •
Man
ages
use
r acc
ount
s •
Mul
titas
king
// M
ultip
roce
ssin
g //
Mul
tipro
gram
min
g //
Tim
e sl
icin
g •
Bat
ch p
roce
ssin
g //
real
tim
e pr
oces
sing
4
*7599895984*
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
DC (LK/CGW) 161583/3 R© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12Paper 1 Theory February/March 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
1 Some types of software can be described as free software or freeware.
Draw lines to link each description to a correct type of software. A description can be linked to more than one type of software.
Description Type of software
Free to download
Free software
Code can be modified and redistributed
Freeware
Subject to copyright legislation
[2]
2 David has installed anti-virus software on his computer.
(a) State three tasks carried out by anti-virus software.
Task 1 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Task 2 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Task 3 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
3
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) David is still concerned that his computer might get infected by a computer virus.
State three other ways in which David can reduce the risk of his computer getting a computer virus.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
3 Parity checks can be used to check for errors during data transmission.
One of the bytes has been transmitted incorrectly.
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
10110011 10101000 10110100 10110101
(a) State which byte was incorrectly transmitted.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain how you identified the incorrectly transmitted byte.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
4
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
4 An air conditioning system is used to control the temperature in a hospital.
The air conditioning system uses temperature sensors and a microprocessor.
The temperature must remain between 21 °C and 24 °C.
Describe how the sensors and the microprocessor are used to control the temperature of the hospital.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[6]
5 The IP address of a computer is stored as a set of four 8-bit binary numbers.
The network administrator converts each binary number into hexadecimal.
(a) Complete the table to show the hexadecimal equivalent of the binary IP address. The first number has already been converted.
Binary IP address
11000100 00010000 11111110 00001001
Hexadecimal
C4 [3]
(b) Explain why the network administrator uses hexadecimal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
5
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
6 Primary, secondary and off-line are types of storage.
Give an example of each type of storage.
For each example state how it is used.
Primary storage
Example ...........................................................................................................................................
Use ...................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Secondary storage
Example ...........................................................................................................................................
Use ...................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Off-line storage
Example ...........................................................................................................................................
Use ...................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
6
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
7 (a) For this logic circuit:
A
BX
C
Complete the truth table.
A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[4]
7
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) For this logic statement:
X = 1 if (B is 1 OR C is NOT 1) AND ((A is NOT 1) AND (B is 1 OR C is 1))
Draw a logic circuit.
A
B
C
X
[6]
(c) Complete the truth table for the logic statement given in part (b).
A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[4]
8
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
8 (a) Three descriptions and two methods of data transmission are given.
Tick () the correct box to show the Method of data transmission for each description.
Description Method
Serial Parallel
Multiple bits are sent and received at the same time.
Bits are sent one at a time in a single direction.
Bits are sent using a single wire. Data can be sent or received, but not at the same time.
[3]
(b) Three descriptions and three types of data transmission are given.
Tick () the correct box to show the Type of data transmission for each description.
Description Type
Simplex Half-duplex Duplex
Multiple bits are sent and received at the same time.
Bits are sent one at a time in a single direction.
Bits are sent using a single wire. Data can be sent or received, but not at the same time.
[3]
9
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
9 A 32-second sound clip will be recorded. The sound will be sampled 16000 times a second.
Each sample will be stored using 8 bits.
Calculate the file size in kilobytes. You must show all of your working.
File Size ..................................................................................................... kB[3]
10 The table shows a segment of primary memory from a Von Neumann model computer.
Address Contents
10001 11001101
10010 11110001
10011 10101111
10100 10000110
10101 00011001
10110 10101100
The program counter contains the data 10010.
(a) (i) State the data that will be placed in the memory address register (MAR).
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the data that will be placed in the memory data register (MDR).
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
10
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
(b) Describe the stored program concept when applied to the Von Neumann model.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
11 Miriam needs to use a large high-resolution photo as a thumbnail image on a website.
She will use lossy compression to reduce the file size of the photo to create the thumbnail image.
(a) State why a smaller file size is appropriate for this situation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain how lossy compression reduces the file size.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
11
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
12 A hospital stores the results of medical tests on a computer system. Each patient is given a wristband containing a unique barcode. The barcode is used every time the patient has a medical test.
(a) Explain two benefits of using barcodes in this situation.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Describe how the barcode is read.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
12
0478/12/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
13 State four functions of an operating system.
Function 1 ........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 2 ........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 3 ........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Function 4 ........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................[4]
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 9 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22 Paper 2 March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
9
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
9
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
Sect
ion
A
1(a)
(i)
1 m
ark
for n
ame
and
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te d
ata
stru
ctur
e fro
m T
ask
1 e.
g.
nam
e studentName
D
ata
stru
ctur
e A
rray
2
1(a)
(ii)
1 m
ark
for n
ame,
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te v
alue
and
1 m
ark
for a
ppro
pria
te u
se. F
rom
any
task
e.g
. C
onst
ant n
ame
classSize
V
alue
30
U
se
Fixe
d nu
mbe
r of s
tude
nts
in a
cla
ss
Var
iabl
e na
me
counter
D
ata
type
in
tege
r U
se
to c
ount
the
num
ber o
f stu
dent
nam
es e
nter
ed
6
1(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cha
ngin
g th
e va
lue
of a
var
iabl
e/co
nsta
nt/ c
ount
er, 1
mar
k fo
r cha
nge
to th
e pr
ogra
m e
.g.
Val
ue:
Cha
nge
the
valu
e of
the
varia
ble/
cons
tant maxGroupSize
in T
ask
2 to
25
Pro
gram
cha
nge:
O
vers
ubsc
ribed
test
will
be
chan
ged
to te
st fo
r ove
r 50
// se
cond
gro
up s
tarts
at 2
6
2
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(c)
A
ny fi
ve fr
om
In
itial
ise
subj
ect c
ount
s
Loop
thro
ugh
stud
ents
Inpu
t and
sto
re s
tude
nt n
ame
and
inpu
t and
sto
re tw
o su
bjec
t cho
ices
for t
hat s
tude
nt
U
pdat
e su
bjec
t cou
nts
// up
date
sub
ject
list
s of
stu
dent
nam
es
E
rror
mes
sage
if s
ubje
ct n
ot fo
und
O
utpu
t tot
al s
ubje
ct c
ount
s
Pro
mpt
s fo
r all
inpu
ts a
nd m
essa
ges
with
all
outp
uts
Sam
ple
answ
er fo
r Tas
k 1
physics
0; chemistry
0; history
0; geography
0; compSci
0;
FOR counter
1 TO 60
INPUT name, subject(1), subject(2)
studentName(counter)
name
studentCounter1(counter)
subject(1)
studentCounter2(counter)
subject(2)
FOR sCount
1 TO 2
CASE subject(sCount) OF
ˈPhysicsˈ: physics
physics + 1
ˈChemistryˈ: chemistry
chemistry + 1
ˈHistoryˈ: history
history + 1
ˈGeographyˈ: geography
geography + 1
ˈComputer Scienceˈ: compSci
compSci + 1
OTHERWISE: PRINT ˈError subject not foundˈ
ENDCASE
NEXT
NEXT
PRINT ˈGroup Number of Studentsˈ
PRINT ˈPhysics ˈ,physics
PRINT ˈChemistry ˈ,chemistry
PRINT ˈHistory ˈ,history
PRINT ˈGeography ˈ,geography
PRINT ˈComputer Science ˈ,compSci
5
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(d)
A
ny fi
ve fr
om
Exp
lana
tion
for c
alcu
latio
n of
tota
l num
ber o
f spa
re p
lace
s
C
heck
the
num
ber o
f stu
dent
s w
ho h
ave
chos
en e
ach
subj
ect
If
less
than
10
no p
lace
s av
aila
ble
(O
ther
wis
e)If
less
than
20
C
alcu
late
num
ber o
f spa
re p
lace
s (2
0 –
num
ber)
If m
ore
than
20
and
less
than
40
C
alcu
late
num
ber o
f spa
re p
lace
s (4
0 –
num
ber)
Kee
p a
runn
ing
tota
l of t
he to
tal n
umbe
r of s
pare
pla
ces
5
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
Sect
ion
B
2(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h er
ror i
dent
ified
+ s
ugge
sted
cor
rect
ion
NUMBERS
shou
ld b
e Number
IF Number > 100
shou
ld b
e IF Number >= 100
INPUT Number
is m
issi
ng fr
om in
side
the
loop
inse
rt INPUT Number
afte
r the
IF
stat
emen
t Th
e fin
al PRINT Number
is n
ot n
eede
d re
mov
e it
4
2(b)
O
ne m
ark
for b
oth
ends
of t
he ra
nge
and
corr
ect i
nequ
ality
sym
bols
and
one
mar
k fo
r the
AN
D.
The
test
sho
uld
be IF Number >= 100 AND Number <= 200
2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3
Wei
ght
tota
lWei
ght
tota
lNum
ber
OU
TPU
T
0
0
50
50
1
70
120
2
65
185
3
100
285
4
95
380
5
50
430
6
55
485
7
85
570
8
70
640
9 Li
ft ov
erlo
ad, s
tep
out
One
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t col
umn.
4
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 1
mar
k fo
r val
ue a
nd 1
mar
k fo
r app
ropr
iate
reas
on e
.g.
Val
ue 1
2
(1)
boun
dary
sho
uld
be a
ccep
ted
as w
eigh
t OK
(1)
Val
ue 2
two
(1)
erro
neou
s/ab
norm
al s
houl
d be
reje
cted
(1)
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5 2
mar
ks fo
r app
ropr
iate
exp
lana
tion,
1 m
ark
exam
ple
prog
ram
min
g st
atem
ents
sho
win
g se
quen
ce, 1
mar
k ex
ampl
e pr
ogra
mm
ing
stat
emen
t(s) s
how
ing
sele
ctio
n e.
g.
Seq
uenc
e is
the
conc
ept o
f one
sta
tem
ent b
eing
exe
cute
d af
ter a
noth
er(1
) whe
reas
sel
ectio
n de
cide
s w
hich
sta
tem
ent(s
) are
to
be
exec
uted
dep
endi
ng u
pon
the
resu
lt of
a q
uest
ion
(1)
sequ
ence
exa
mpl
e (1
) PRINT X
PRINT Y
S
elec
tion
exam
ple
(1)
IF X > Y THEN PRINT X ELSE PRINT Y
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(a)
1
mar
k fo
r app
ropr
iate
fiel
d na
me
and
appr
opria
te d
ata
type
, the
n 1
mar
k fo
r app
ropr
iate
exp
lana
tion.
e.g
. M
etal
, typ
e te
xt(1
) a s
ingl
e ch
arac
ter/w
ord
that
can
be
inpu
t acc
urat
ely/
quic
kly(
1)
Item
, typ
e te
xt (1
) a s
ingl
e ch
arac
ter/w
ord
that
can
be
inpu
t acc
urat
ely/
quic
kly(
1)
Num
ber i
n S
tock
, typ
e nu
mbe
r (1)
can
be
used
for c
alcu
latio
ns (1
) P
rice,
type
cur
renc
y (1
) pro
perly
form
atte
d an
d ca
n be
use
d fo
r cal
cula
tions
(1)
8
6(b)
A
ll fie
lds
coul
d co
ntai
n du
plic
ate
valu
es
1
0478
/22
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
arch
201
8 ©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
9
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(c)
Fiel
d:M
etal
Ite
m
Num
ber i
n S
tock
P
rice
Tabl
e:JE
WE
L JE
WE
L JE
WE
L JE
WE
L
Sor
t:
Sho
w:
Crit
eria
:=”
silv
er”
=”br
acel
et”
or:
One
mar
k fo
r col
umns
1 +
2, o
ne m
ark
for c
olum
ns 3
+ 4
O
ne m
ark
for a
ccur
acy
of s
ynta
x an
d sp
ellin
g
3
*7849693024*
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (LK) 148975/1© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming February/March 2018PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been received at the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/22/PRE/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
Students in a school are allowed to choose extra subjects each year. Students provide the school administrator with their names and their subject choices. Places in subject groups are allocated on a ‘first come, first served’ basis. There are two classes of 30 students and they can each choose two extra subjects from:
• Physics• Chemistry• History• Geography• Computer Science
The maximum group size for each subject choice is 20 students and the minimum group size is 10 students. If more than 20 students choose a subject then that subject can be split into two groups. Each subject can have no more than two groups. If less than 10 students choose a subject then it is not available that year. A program is required to show a summary of the number of students who have chosen each subject, identify subject group sizes, produce subject group lists and identify problems.
Write and test a program or programs for the school administrator.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data. • Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably. • All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Data entry and number of students who have chosen each subject.
The school administrator enters the data for each student. Write a program for TASK 1 to store this data then calculate and output the number of students who have chosen each subject.
TASK 2 – Output subject group lists and identify problems.
Using your results from TASK 1, allocate students to subject groups. Print out list(s) of student names for each viable subject group. Identify any subjects that are over or undersubscribed, identify the students who have been allocated to one subject group only and those who have not been allocated to any group. Print out this information.
TASK 3 – Identify spare places in subject groups.
Using your results from TASK 2, print out the number of spare places for each subject. Any group that has fewer than 20 students has spare places. Calculate the total number of spare places and the total number of unallocated student choices. Show whether the number of spare places available is enough to cover the unallocated choices.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
*4259785415*
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (LK/CGW) 148974/2© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming February/March 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
Students in a school are allowed to choose extra subjects each year. Students provide the school administrator with their names and their subject choices. Places in subject groups are allocated on a ‘first come, first served’ basis. There are two classes of 30 students and they can each choose two extra subjects from:
• Physics• Chemistry• History• Geography• Computer Science
The maximum group size for each subject choice is 20 students and the minimum group size is 10 students. If more than 20 students choose a subject then that subject can be split into two groups. Each subject can have no more than two groups. If less than 10 students choose a subject then it is not available that year. A program is required to show a summary of the number of students who have chosen each subject, identify subject group sizes, produce subject group lists and identify problems.
Write and test a program or programs for the school administrator.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data. • Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably. • All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Data entry and number of students who have chosen each subject.
The school administrator enters the data for each student. Write a program for TASK 1 to store this data then calculate and output the number of students who have chosen each subject.
TASK 2 – Output subject group lists and identify problems.
Using your results from TASK 1, allocate students to subject groups. Print out list(s) of student names for each viable subject group. Identify any subjects that are over or undersubscribed, identify the students who have been allocated to one subject group only and those who have not been allocated to any group. Print out this information.
TASK 3 – Identify spare places in subject groups.
Using your results from TASK 2, print out the number of spare places for each subject. Any group that has fewer than 20 students has spare places. Calculate the total number of spare places and the total number of unallocated student choices. Show whether the number of spare places available is enough to cover the unallocated choices.
3
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
1 (a) All identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) State the name and data structure that you have used to record student names in Task 1.
Name .................................................................................................................................
Data structure .................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of one constant and the name of one variable that you could have used in your programmed solution.
State the value that would be assigned to the constant. State the data type for the variable. Explain what each one would be used for in your programmed solution.
Constant name ..................................................................................................................
Value .................................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Variable name ...................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
(b) Explain how you would change your program for Task 2 if the maximum group size for each subject is increased to 25.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
4
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
(c) Write an algorithm to complete Task 1, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
5
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
6
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
(d) Explain how your program calculates the total number of spare places in Task 3. Any programming statements shown in your answer must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
7
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Section B
2 An algorithm has been written in pseudocode to input some numbers and print out any numbers that are greater than or equal to 100. The number 999 stops the algorithm.
INPUT Number WHILE NUMBERS <> 999 DO IF Number > 100 THEN PRINT Number ENDIF ENDWHILE PRINT Number
(a) Find the four errors in the pseudocode and suggest corrections.
Error 1 .......................................................................................................................................
Correction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Error 2 .......................................................................................................................................
Correction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Error 3 .......................................................................................................................................
Correction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Error 4 .......................................................................................................................................
Correction .................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Show, using pseudocode, how you would change the corrected algorithm to print out any numbers between 100 and 200 inclusive.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
8
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
3 This flowchart inputs the weight in kilograms of a passenger stepping into a lift. The lift can take a maximum of eight passengers or a maximum weight of 640 kilograms.
START
END
IstotalWeight
> 640?
IstotalNumber
> 8?
INPUT Weight
totalWeight 0totalNumber 0
OUTPUT 'Liftoverload, step
out'
No
No
Yes
Yes
totalWeight totalWeight + WeighttotalNumber totalNumber + 1
9
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Complete the trace table for the passenger input data:
50, 70, 65, 100, 95, 50, 55, 85, 70, 75
Weight totalWeight totalNumber OUTPUT
[4]
10
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
4 A program checks if the weight of a baby is at least 2 kilograms.
Give, with reasons, two different values of test data that could be used for the baby’s weight. Each reason must be different.
Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................
Reason .............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................
Reason .............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
5 Explain the difference between the programming concepts of sequence and selection. Include an example of a programming statement for each concept in your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
11
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
6 A database table, JEWEL, is used to keep a record of jewellery for sale in a shop. Each item of jewellery can be made of silver, platinum or gold metal. The shop stocks rings, bracelets and necklaces. The number in stock and the price is also stored.
(a) Identify the four fields required for the database. Give each field a suitable name and data type. Explain why you chose the data type for each field.
Field 1 Name .................................................... Data type .....................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Field 2 Name .................................................... Data type .....................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Field 3 Name .................................................... Data type .....................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Field 4 Name .................................................... Data type .....................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [8]
(b) Explain why none of these fields could be used as a primary key.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Using the query-by-example grid below, write a query to identify the silver bracelets. Only display the number in stock and the price.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or: [3]
12
0478/22/F/M/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
Grade thresholds – June 2018
Learn more! For more information please visit www.cambridgeinternational.org/igcse or contact Customer Services on +44 (0)1223 553554 or email [email protected]
Cambridge IGCSE™ Computer Science (0478) Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0478 (Computer Science) in the June 2018 examination.
minimum raw mark required for grade:
maximum raw
mark available
A B C D E F G
Component 11 75 47 36 26 21 15 10 5
Component 12 75 45 35 26 21 15 10 5
Component 13 75 45 35 26 20 15 10 5
Component 21 50 31 23 15 12 10 7 4
Component 22 50 29 21 14 11 9 6 3
Component 23 50 32 25 18 15 12 9 6 Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component. The maximum total mark for this syllabus, after weighting has been applied, is 125. The overall thresholds for the different grades were set as follows.
Option Combination of Components A* A B C D E F G
AX 11, 21 95 77 59 41 33 25 17 9
AY 12, 22 90 73 56 40 32 24 16 8
AZ 13, 23 92 76 60 44 35 27 19 11
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/11 Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
12
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
12
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t ans
wer
, in
the
give
n or
der:
−
anal
ogue
−
digi
tal
− de
nary
−
10
− bi
nary
−
2
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t con
vers
ion:
− 42
−
257
− 54
2
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3 1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
regi
ster
, 3 m
arks
for r
easo
n:
−
Reg
iste
r C
Any
thre
e fro
m:
− C
ount
the
num
ber o
f 1/0
bits
(in
each
byt
e/re
gist
er)
− Tw
o by
tes/
regi
ster
s ha
ve a
n od
d nu
mbe
r of 1
/0 b
its //
Tw
o us
e od
d pa
rity
− O
dd p
arity
mus
t be
the
parit
y us
ed
− O
ne b
yte/
regi
ster
has
an
even
num
ber o
f 1/0
bits
// O
ne u
ses
even
par
ity
− O
ne w
ith a
n ev
en n
umbe
r of o
ne b
its/e
ven
parit
y is
inco
rrec
t // R
egis
ter C
sho
uld
have
odd
par
ity
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t ans
wer
: Lo
ssy
(com
pres
sion
) Lo
ssle
ss (c
ompr
essi
on)
2
4(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
com
pres
sion
, 3 m
arks
for d
escr
iptio
n:
−
Loss
less
(com
pres
sion
) A
ny th
ree
from
: −
The
file
can
be re
stor
ed/d
ecom
pres
sed
to th
e ex
act s
ame
stat
e it
was
bef
ore
com
pres
sion
/ to
orig
inal
−
(It is
a c
ompu
ter p
rogr
am s
o) n
o da
ta c
an b
e lo
st //
Los
sy w
ould
rem
ove
data
−
Will
not
run
corr
ectly
(with
any
oth
er c
ompr
essi
on)
− (L
ossl
ess)
will
giv
e re
peat
ing
wor
ds/s
ectio
ns o
f wor
d a
valu
e// R
LE is
use
d //
Oth
er v
alid
exa
mpl
es o
f met
hods
of
lo
ssle
ss c
ompr
essi
on
− V
alue
is re
cord
ed in
an
inde
x
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t lin
e, u
p to
a m
axim
um o
f 5 m
arks
: C
ompo
nent
Des
crip
tion
Imm
edia
te a
cces
s st
ore
(IAS
)
H
olds
dat
a an
d in
stru
ctio
ns w
hen
they
are
lo
aded
from
mai
n m
emor
y an
d ar
e w
aitin
g to
be
proc
esse
d.
Reg
iste
r
Hol
ds d
ata
tem
pora
rily
that
is c
urre
ntly
be
ing
used
in a
cal
cula
tion.
Con
trol u
nit
(CU
)
Hol
ds d
ata
or in
stru
ctio
ns te
mpo
raril
y w
hen
they
are
bei
ng p
roce
ssed
.
Acc
umul
ator
(A
CC
)
Man
ages
the
flow
of d
ata
and
inte
ract
ion
betw
een
the
com
pone
nts
of th
e pr
oces
sor.
Arit
hmet
ic lo
gic
unit
(ALU
)
Car
ries
out t
he c
alcu
latio
ns o
n da
ta.
Bus
Pat
hway
for t
rans
mitt
ing
data
and
in
stru
ctio
ns.
5
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t log
ic g
ate
(with
the
corr
ect d
irect
ion
of in
put(s
))
6
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(b)
4
mar
ks fo
r 8 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
3 m
arks
for 6
or 7
cor
rect
out
puts
2
mar
ks fo
r 4 o
r 5 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
1 m
ark
for 2
or 3
cor
rect
out
puts
A
B
C
W
orki
ng s
pace
X
0 0
0
1 0
0 1
1
0 1
0
1 0
1 1
1
1 0
0
0 1
0 1
1
1 1
0
1 1
1 1
1
4
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7 C
ompi
ler
Any
thre
e fro
m:
− Tr
ansl
ates
hig
h-le
vel l
angu
age
into
mac
hine
cod
e/lo
w le
vel l
angu
age
− Tr
ansl
ates
(the
sou
rce
code
) all
in o
ne g
o/al
l at o
nce
− P
rodu
ces
an e
xecu
tabl
e fil
e −
Pro
duce
s an
err
or re
port
Inte
rpre
ter
Any
thre
e fro
m:
– Tr
ansl
ates
hig
h-le
vel l
angu
age
into
mac
hine
cod
e/lo
w le
vel l
angu
age
− Tr
ansl
ates
(the
sou
rce
code
) lin
e by
line
/sta
tem
ent b
y st
atem
ent
– S
tops
if it
find
s an
err
or
– W
ill o
nly
cont
inue
whe
n er
ror i
s fix
ed
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
− S
hine
s lig
ht /
(red
) las
er a
t bar
code
−
Ligh
t is
calle
d an
illu
min
ator
−
Ligh
t is
refle
cted
bac
k //
Whi
te li
nes
refle
ct li
ght /
/ Bla
ck li
nes
refle
ct le
ss li
ght/a
bsor
bs li
ght
− S
enso
rs /
phot
oele
ctric
cel
ls d
etec
t the
ligh
t −
Diff
eren
t ref
lect
ions
/ ba
rs w
ill g
ive
diffe
rent
bin
ary
valu
es /
digi
tal v
alue
s //
patte
rn c
onve
rted
to d
igita
l val
ues
− A
mic
ropr
oces
sor i
nter
pret
s th
e da
ta
4
8(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
: −
barc
ode
iden
tifie
s a
(uni
que)
pro
duct
−
barc
ode
can
be u
sed
to lo
ok u
p pr
oduc
t (in
a d
atab
ase)
−
data
abo
ut s
tock
leve
ls c
an b
e st
ored
on
a sy
stem
−
stoc
k ca
n be
aut
omat
ical
ly d
educ
ted
from
the
syst
em
− ca
n ch
eck
stoc
k is
bel
ow a
cer
tain
leve
l // c
heck
sto
ck le
vel
− au
tom
atic
re-o
rder
// A
lerts
whe
n st
ock
is lo
w
− au
tom
atic
ally
upd
ate
new
sto
ck le
vel
− to
loca
te if
an
item
of s
tock
is a
vaila
ble
in a
noth
er lo
catio
n
3
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
10 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(c)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
− (In
frare
d) ra
ys a
re s
ent a
cros
s sc
reen
(fro
m th
e ed
ges)
−
Has
sen
sors
aro
und
edge
// S
enso
rs c
aptu
re b
eam
s −
(Infra
red)
rays
form
a g
rid a
cros
s th
e sc
reen
−
(Infra
red)
ray
is b
roke
n (b
y a
finge
r blo
ckin
g a
beam
) −
Cal
cula
tion
is m
ade
(on
whe
re b
eam
is b
roke
n) to
loca
te th
e ‘to
uch’
// C
o-or
dina
tes
are
used
to lo
cate
the
touc
h
4
8(d)
S
econ
dary
Sto
rage
– a
ny tw
o fro
m:
− N
ot d
irect
ly a
cces
sed
by th
e C
PU
−
Non
-vol
atile
sto
rage
−
Sec
onda
ry is
inte
rnal
to th
e co
mpu
ter/d
evic
e
− A
n ex
ampl
e of
sec
onda
ry s
tora
ge w
ould
be
HD
D/S
SD
O
ff-lin
e st
orag
e –
any
two
from
: −
Non
-vol
atile
sto
rage
−
Off-
line
stor
age
is s
tora
ge th
at is
rem
ovab
le fr
om a
com
pute
r/dev
ice
// no
t int
erna
l // p
orta
ble
− A
n ex
ampl
e of
off-
line
stor
age
wou
ld b
e C
D/D
VD
/US
B s
tick/
SD
car
d/m
agne
tic ta
pe/ e
xter
nal H
DD
/SS
D
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9 A
ny s
ix fr
om:
− S
uita
ble
biom
etric
dev
ice,
suc
h as
fing
erpr
int s
cann
er/re
tina/
eye/
iris
scan
ner/f
ace
reco
gniti
on/v
oice
re
cogn
ition
/pal
m s
cann
er //
des
crip
tion
of u
se e
.g. u
se fi
nger
prin
t on
devi
ce
− S
enso
r (in
bio
met
ric d
evic
e) c
aptu
res/
take
s da
ta/re
adin
gs (o
f use
r)
− D
ata/
read
ings
are
con
verte
d fro
m a
nalo
gue
to d
igita
l (us
ing
AD
C)
− D
ata/
read
ing
sent
to th
e m
icro
proc
esso
r −
Dat
a/re
adin
gs c
ompa
red
to s
tore
d va
lues
/dat
a
− if
dat
a/re
adin
gs m
atch
use
r can
ent
er
− if
dat
a/re
adin
gs d
o no
t mat
ch u
ser i
s de
clin
ed e
ntry
// u
ser a
sked
to tr
y ag
ain
−
ale
rt m
ay b
e se
nt to
sec
urity
// a
larm
may
sou
nd
6
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
11 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(a
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
− S
truct
ure
and
pres
enta
tion
are
defin
ed u
sing
(mar
k-up
) tag
s −
Stru
ctur
e an
d pr
esen
tatio
n di
ctat
e th
e ap
pear
ance
of t
he w
ebsi
te
− S
truct
ure
is u
sed
for l
ayou
t −
Exa
mpl
e of
stru
ctur
e
− P
rese
ntat
ion
is u
sed
for f
orm
attin
g / s
tyle
−
Exa
mpl
e of
form
attin
g
− S
epar
ate
file
/ CS
S c
an b
e us
ed fo
r pre
sent
atio
n co
nten
t
4
10(b
)(i)
1 m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect p
art
−
dom
ain
(nam
e)
− fil
e na
me/
web
page
nam
e
2
10(b
)(ii)
A
ny tw
o fro
m:
− H
yper
text
Tra
nsfe
r Pro
toco
l Sec
ure
// it
is th
e ac
cess
pro
toco
l // I
t is
a pr
otoc
ol
− It
mea
ns th
e w
ebsi
te u
ses
SS
L/TL
S
− It
mea
ns d
ata
sent
(to
and
from
the
web
serv
er) i
s en
cryp
ted
2
10(c
) A
ny tw
o fro
m e
.g. :
−
To s
tore
item
s th
at a
cus
tom
er h
as a
dded
to a
n on
line
shop
ping
bas
ket
− To
sto
re a
cus
tom
er’s
cre
dit c
ard
deta
ils
− To
sto
re lo
g-in
det
ails
−
To tr
ack
wha
t pro
duct
a c
usto
mer
bro
wse
s //
Trac
k m
usic
pre
fere
nces
−
Targ
eted
adv
ertis
ing
// m
akin
g re
com
men
datio
ns
− P
erso
nalis
es/c
usto
mis
es th
e ex
perie
nce
− S
how
s w
ho a
re n
ew a
nd re
turn
ing
cust
omer
s −
To s
peed
up
log-
in ti
mes
−
To s
peed
up/
allo
w s
ingl
e cl
ick
purc
hase
s −
Impr
oves
the
expe
rienc
e
2
0478
/11
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
12 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(d
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
− P
reve
nts
dire
ct a
cces
s to
the
web
serv
er //
Sits
bet
wee
n us
er a
nd w
ebse
rver
−
If an
atta
ck is
laun
ched
it h
its th
e pr
oxy
serv
er in
stea
d //
can
be u
sed
to h
elp
prev
ent D
DO
S //
hel
p pr
even
t ha
ckin
g of
web
serv
er
− U
sed
to d
irect
inva
lid tr
affic
aw
ay fr
om th
e w
ebse
rver
−
Traf
fic is
exa
min
ed b
y th
e pr
oxy
serv
er //
Filt
ers
traffi
c −
If tra
ffic
is v
alid
the
data
from
the
web
serv
er w
ill b
e ob
tain
ed b
y th
e us
er
− If
traffi
c is
inva
lid th
e re
ques
t to
obta
in d
ata
is d
eclin
ed
− C
an b
lock
requ
ests
from
cer
tain
IP a
ddre
sses
4
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 10 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12 Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
10
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
10
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h un
it, in
the
give
n or
der:
–
nibb
le
– by
te
–
meg
abyt
e (M
B)
– gi
gaby
te (G
B)
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2(a)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– Im
age
is c
onve
rted
from
ana
logu
e to
dig
ital (
usin
g A
DC
) –
Imag
e is
turn
ed in
to p
ixel
s –
Eac
h pi
xel i
s gi
ven
a bi
nary
val
ue
– P
ixel
s fo
rm a
grid
(to
crea
te th
e im
age)
–
Eac
h pi
xel h
as a
col
our
– P
ixel
s ar
e st
ored
in s
eque
nce
(in a
file
) –
Met
a da
ta is
sto
red
(to d
escr
ibe
the
dim
ensi
ons/
reso
lutio
n of
the
imag
e) //
It s
tore
s th
e di
men
sion
s/co
lour
de
pth
.etc
. –
An
exam
ple
of a
sui
tabl
e ph
oto
file
form
at e
.g. J
PE
G
4
2(b)
1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
com
pres
sion
, 3 m
arks
for e
xpla
natio
n:
–
Loss
y
Any
thre
e fro
m:
– Lo
ssy
wou
ld re
duce
the
file
size
mor
e (th
an lo
ssle
ss)
– Th
e re
dund
ant d
ata
can
be re
mov
ed fr
om th
e fil
es //
by
exam
ple
(mus
t be
abou
t red
unda
nt d
ata)
–
Imag
es c
an s
till b
e a
sim
ilar q
ualit
y –
Ther
e is
no
requ
irem
ent f
or th
e fil
es to
be
exac
tly th
e sa
me
as o
rigin
al fi
le
– P
hoto
s ca
n be
sen
t qui
cker
// fa
ster
to u
ploa
d //
fast
er to
dow
nloa
d
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t reg
iste
r
Hou
rs
0 0
0 0
0 0
1 0
Min
utes
0
0 0
1 1
1 1
1
Sec
onds
0
0 1
1 1
0 1
0
3
3(b)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t sec
tion:
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t sec
tion:
1 1
0 1
0 0
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 m
ark
1
mar
k
1 m
ark
3
0 5
2 6
5 5
Hour
s M
inut
es
Seco
nds
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5 1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
regi
ster
, 3 m
arks
for r
easo
n:
–
Reg
iste
r Y
Any
thre
e fro
m:
– C
ount
the
num
ber o
f 1/0
bits
(in
each
byt
e/re
gist
er)
– Tw
o by
tes/
regi
ster
s ha
ve a
n od
d nu
mbe
r of 1
/0 b
its //
Tw
o ha
ve o
dd p
arity
–
Eve
n pa
rity
mus
t be
the
parit
y us
ed
– O
ne b
yte/
regi
ster
has
an
even
num
ber o
f 1/0
bits
// O
ne u
ses
even
par
ity
– Th
e tw
o w
ith a
n od
d nu
mbe
r of o
ne b
its/o
dd p
arity
are
inco
rrec
t // R
egis
ter X
and
Z s
houl
d ha
ve e
ven
parit
y
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t mis
sing
wor
d, in
the
give
n or
der:
–
fetc
hes
– im
med
iate
acc
ess
stor
e //
IAS
–
prog
ram
cou
nter
// P
C
– m
emor
y ad
dres
s re
gist
er //
MA
R
– m
emor
y da
ta re
gist
er //
MD
R
– ex
ecut
ed
– ar
ithm
etic
logi
c un
it //
ALU
–
accu
mul
ator
// A
CC
8
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7(a)
1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t log
ic g
ate
with
cor
rect
dire
ct o
f inp
ut(s
):
6
7(b)
4
mar
ks fo
r 8 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
3 m
arks
for 6
or 7
cor
rect
out
puts
2
mar
ks fo
r 4 o
r 5 c
orre
ct o
utpu
ts
1 m
ark
for 2
or 3
cor
rect
out
puts
A
B
C
Wor
king
spa
ce
X 0
0 0
1
0 0
1
1
0 1
0
0
0 1
1
0
1 0
0
1
1 0
1
1
1 1
0
0
1 1
1
0
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8 1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
tran
slat
or, 3
mar
ks fo
r exp
lana
tion:
– C
ompi
ler
Any
thre
e fro
m:
– D
oes
not r
equi
re re
com
pila
tion
// co
mpi
led
prog
ram
can
be
exec
uted
with
out a
com
pile
r
– ...
ther
efor
e, a
llow
s fa
ster
exe
cutio
n –
Pro
vide
s an
exe
cuta
ble
file
–
ther
efor
e, a
llow
s hi
m to
just
sen
d m
achi
ne c
ode
– D
imitr
i’s fr
iend
doe
s no
t nee
d tra
nsla
tion/
com
pila
tion
softw
are
to e
xecu
te th
e pr
ogra
m
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9(a)
Q
R/Q
uick
resp
onse
1
9(b)
A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– R
ead/
scan
ned
usin
g ap
p (o
n m
obile
dev
ice)
–
It is
the
cam
era
that
is u
sed
to s
can/
capt
ure
the
imag
e –
The
thre
e la
rge
squa
res
are
used
to d
efin
e th
e al
ignm
ent /
/ use
s al
ignm
ent t
arge
ts/m
odul
es
– B
lack
squ
ares
refle
ct le
ss li
ght /
/ whi
te s
quar
es re
flect
mor
e lig
ht
– Th
e ap
p/de
vice
pro
cess
es th
e im
age
– E
ach
smal
l squ
are/
pixe
l is
conv
erte
d to
a b
inar
y va
lue
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(a
) A
ny fo
ur fr
om:
– C
ondu
ctiv
e la
yer
– A
n el
ectro
stat
ic/e
lect
ric fi
eld
is c
reat
ed
– Se
nsor
(s) (
arou
nd th
e sc
reen
) mon
itor t
he e
lect
rost
atic
fiel
d –
Whe
n to
uche
d (e
lect
rost
atic
) cha
rge
is tr
ansf
erre
d to
fing
er
– Lo
catio
n of
touc
h is
cal
cula
ted
// C
o-or
dina
tes
used
to c
alcu
late
touc
h
4
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10(b
)(i)
Any
two
from
: –
Glo
ves
are
not c
ondu
ctiv
e //
Glo
ves
are
an in
sula
tor
– B
lock
cur
rent
/cha
rge
from
fing
er /
body
/ pe
rson
–
Sto
p th
e el
ectro
stat
ic fi
eld
bein
g di
stur
bed/
chan
ged
2
10(b
)(ii)
A
ny tw
o fro
m e
.g. (
1 m
ark
for m
etho
d, 1
for e
xpan
sion
): –
She
cou
ld u
se a
(con
duct
ive)
sty
lus
–
this
will
allo
w th
e ch
arge
to b
e ch
arge
d/di
stur
bed
–
She
cou
ld u
se c
apac
itive
glo
ves
–
this
will
allo
w th
e ch
arge
to b
e ch
arge
d/di
stur
bed
–
She
cou
ld u
se a
nat
ural
lang
uage
inte
rface
/voi
ce o
pera
ted
inte
rface
– s
he c
ould
giv
e vo
cal c
omm
ands
to th
e de
vice
2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
11
Any
six
from
: –
Sui
tabl
e se
nsor
(mot
ion/
infra
-red
) –
Dat
a co
nver
ted
(from
ana
logu
e) to
dig
ital (
usin
g A
DC
) –
Dat
a se
nt to
mic
ropr
oces
sor
– D
ata
is c
ompa
red
to s
tore
d va
lue/
rang
e
– if
dat
a m
atch
es/o
ut o
f ran
ge d
ata
secu
rity
light
turn
ed o
n
– w
aits
for s
uita
ble
perio
d/un
til n
o m
otio
n de
tect
ed
–
ligh
t tur
ned
off
– C
ontin
uous
loop
/pro
cess
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
12(a
)(i)
Enc
rypt
ion
1
0478
/12
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
10 o
f 10
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
12(a
)(ii)
A
ny fi
ve fr
om:
– H
er p
erso
nal d
etai
ls b
efor
e en
cryp
tion
is th
e pl
ain
text
–
The
plai
n te
xt/h
er p
erso
nal d
etai
ls is
enc
rypt
ed u
sing
an
encr
yptio
n al
gorit
hm
– Th
e pl
ain
text
/her
per
sona
l det
ails
is e
ncry
pted
usi
ng a
key
–
The
encr
ypte
d te
xt is
cyp
her/c
iphe
r tex
t –
The
key
is tr
ansm
itted
sep
arat
ely
(from
the
text
) –
The
key
is u
sed
to d
ecry
pt th
e cy
pher
text
(afte
r tra
nsm
issi
on)
5
12(b
) A
ny th
ree
from
a s
ingl
e er
ror m
etho
d:
– C
heck
sum
–
Cal
cula
tion
carr
ied
out o
n da
ta
– (c
heck
sum
/cal
cula
ted)
val
ue s
ent w
ith d
ata
– re
calc
ulat
ed a
fter t
rans
mis
sion
and
com
pare
d to
orig
inal
–
If th
ey d
o no
t mat
ch a
n er
ror i
s pr
esen
t
– A
RQ
–
uses
ack
now
ledg
men
t and
tim
eout
–
A re
ques
t is
sent
with
dat
a to
ack
now
ledg
e al
l dat
a is
rece
ived
–
Ack
now
ledg
emen
t sen
t bac
k to
say
all
data
is re
ceiv
ed
– If
no a
ckno
wle
dgem
ent i
s re
ceiv
ed in
a ti
me
fram
e an
err
or in
tran
smis
sion
det
ecte
d / d
ata
auto
mat
ical
ly re
sent
.
3
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 12 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/13 Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
12
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
12
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1 O
ne m
ark
per e
ach
sens
or (s
enso
rs m
ust b
e di
ffere
nt):
App
licat
ion
Sens
or
Wei
ghin
g a
baby
in a
hos
pita
l P
ress
ure
Turn
ing
off a
ket
tle w
hen
it bo
ils
Tem
pera
ture
Con
trolli
ng a
n au
tom
atic
doo
r In
frare
d / L
ight
/ P
ress
ure
Mon
itorin
g th
e ai
r qua
lity
in a
n ae
ropl
ane
Oxy
gen
/ Gas
/ H
umid
ity
Cou
ntin
g ca
rs c
ross
ing
a br
idge
P
ress
ure
/ Inf
rare
d / M
agne
tic
5
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
2
Th
ree
corr
ect l
ines
= 2
mar
ks
Two
or o
ne c
orre
ct li
ne =
1 m
ark
2 Te
rm
Appl
ica�
on
Sim
plex
Half-
dupl
ex
Dupl
ex
A m
icro
phon
e th
at tr
ansm
its d
ata
to a
MID
I sys
tem
.
A tw
o-w
ay ra
dio
(wal
kie
talk
ie) t
hat c
an re
ceiv
e an
d tr
ansm
it m
essa
ges,
but
not
at t
he sa
me
�me.
A te
leph
one
that
can
rece
ive
and
tran
smit
audi
o sig
nals
simul
tane
ously
.
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3 2
mar
ks p
er is
sue
from
: P
hish
ing
– Le
gitim
ate
look
ing
emai
ls s
ent t
o us
e –
Whe
n us
er c
licks
on
atta
chm
ent /
link
sen
t to
fraud
ulen
t web
site
–
Ask
ed to
reve
al/d
esig
ned
to s
teal
sen
sitiv
e in
form
atio
n P
harm
ing
– M
alic
ious
cod
e lo
aded
on
user
har
d dr
ive
– W
ill re
dire
ct U
RL
requ
ests
to fr
audu
lent
web
site
–
Ask
ed to
reve
al/d
esig
ned
to s
teal
sen
sitiv
e in
form
atio
n S
pam
–
Junk
/ un
wan
ted
emai
l –
Sen
t to
larg
e nu
mbe
rs o
f peo
ple
– U
sed
for a
dver
tisin
g / s
prea
ding
mal
war
e –
Fills
up
mai
l box
es
6
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4(a)
(i)
Rec
eive
d B
yte
Tran
smitt
ed
corr
ectly
(
)
Tran
smitt
ed
inco
rrec
tly
()
1000
1011
1010
1110
0101
1101
0010
0101
4
4(a)
(ii)
One
from
: –
AR
Q
– C
heck
Sum
1
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4(b)
(i)
– M
ultip
le b
its /
byte
(s) s
ent a
t the
sam
e tim
e –
Usi
ng m
ultip
le w
ires
2
4(b)
(ii)
Any
one
from
e.g
.: –
Inte
grat
ed C
ircui
ts
– A
ny a
ppro
pria
te C
PU
bus
es
– A
ny s
uita
ble
devi
ce c
onne
ctio
n th
at u
ses
para
llel
1
4(b)
(iii)
Two
from
: –
Bits
rem
ain
sync
hron
ised
– re
duci
ng d
ata
erro
rs
–
Onl
y si
ngle
wire
is re
quire
d
– m
ore
cost
effe
ctiv
e to
inst
all/m
anuf
actu
re
2
4(c)
(i)
– E
ncry
pted
text
is m
eani
ngle
ss
– N
eed
the
key
to d
ecry
pt th
e te
xt
2
4(c)
(ii)
– In
crea
se le
ngth
/ m
ore
bits
use
d fo
r key
– w
ill g
ener
ate
mor
e po
ssib
ilitie
s fo
r key
/ le
ss c
hanc
e of
dec
rypt
ion
by b
rute
forc
e m
etho
d 2
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5(a)
(0
)110
1011
1
5(b)
00
0 10
0101
100
1 m
ark
for t
hree
lead
ing
zero
s, 1
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
bin
ary
num
ber
2
5(c)
B
3 1
mar
k fo
r eac
h co
rrec
t cha
ract
er
2
6(a)
A
ny tw
o fro
m:
– A
sig
nal s
ent f
rom
a d
evic
e / s
oftw
are
– R
eque
sts
proc
esso
r tim
e //
Pro
cess
or s
tops
to s
ervi
ce in
terr
upt
– In
terr
upts
hav
e di
ffere
nt p
riorit
ies
2
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
e.g
.: –
Key
boar
d –
Prin
ter
– M
ouse
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
7(a)
A
ny th
ree
from
: –
Doe
s no
t req
uire
per
iphe
rals
(mou
se o
r key
boar
d)
– N
umbe
r of p
ossi
ble
inpu
ts li
mite
d / m
enu
driv
en in
terfa
ce
– Le
ss c
hanc
e of
inpu
t erro
r –
Res
ista
nt to
wea
ther
3
7(b)
–
Use
s tw
o/m
ultip
le la
yers
–
Whe
n to
p la
yer t
ouch
ed /
push
ed tw
o la
yers
mak
e co
ntac
t –
Circ
uit i
s co
mpl
eted
whe
n la
yers
touc
h –
Poi
nt o
f con
tact
is d
eter
min
ed/c
alcu
late
d
4
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(a)
A
B
C
X
0 0
0 1
0 0
1 1
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
1 0
0 0
1 0
1 1
1 1
0 1
1 1
1 1
All
8 fo
r 4 m
arks
6
or 7
for 3
mar
ks
4 or
5 fo
r 2 m
arks
2
or 3
for 1
mar
k
4
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
8(b)
X
1 m
ark
per g
ate
with
cor
rect
inpu
ts
6
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
10 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
9
Stat
emen
t A
ssem
bler
(
) C
ompi
ler
()
Inte
rpre
ter
()
Tran
slat
es h
igh-
leve
l lan
guag
e in
to
mac
hine
cod
e
Pro
vide
s er
ror
diag
nost
ics
Tran
slat
es w
hole
pr
ogra
m to
obj
ect
code
in o
ne
oper
atio
n
Tran
slat
es a
nd
exec
utes
one
line
of
cod
e at
a ti
me
1 m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect c
olum
n
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
10
Any
six
from
: –
Pro
gram
cou
nter
(PC
) hol
ds a
ddre
ss /
loca
tion
of th
e in
stru
ctio
n –
The
addr
ess
held
in P
C is
sen
t to
MA
R
– A
ddre
ss is
sen
t usi
ng a
ddre
ss b
us
– P
C is
incr
emen
ted
– Th
e in
stru
ctio
n is
sen
t fro
m a
ddre
ss in
mem
ory
to M
DR
–
Inst
ruct
ion
is tr
ansf
erre
d us
ing
the
data
bus
– In
stru
ctio
n se
nt to
CIR
6
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
11 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
11
Any
thre
e fro
m:
– O
ptic
al m
edia
–
Non
-vol
atile
–
Offl
ine
– S
ingl
e (c
ontin
uous
spi
ral)
track
–
Dat
a st
ored
usi
ng la
nds
/ pits
–
Rea
d us
ing
(red
) las
ers
– C
an b
e re
ad o
nly
(R) o
r rea
d w
rite
(RW
)
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
12
256
× 20
0 =
51
200
×
5120
016
=10
240
08
102
400
=10
010
24
Ans
wer
100 k
B
One
mar
k fo
r cor
rect
ans
wer
and
two
mar
ks fo
r cor
rect
cal
cula
tions
.
3
0478
/13
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
12 o
f 12
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
13
Any
six
from
e.g
.: –
Pro
vide
acc
ess
to th
e in
tern
et /
dial
up
/ bro
adba
nd
– U
sual
ly c
harg
e a
mon
thly
fee
– M
onito
r usa
ge
– G
ive
user
s an
IP a
ddre
ss
– D
eter
min
e ba
ndw
idth
–
Sup
ports
dom
ain
nam
es
– P
rovi
de s
ecur
ity s
ervi
ces
– P
rovi
de w
eb h
ostin
g fa
cilit
ies
–
Pro
vide
acc
ess
to E
mai
l / M
ailb
ox
– P
rovi
des
onlin
e da
ta s
tora
ge
6
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 11 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21 Paper 2 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
2 of
11
Gen
eric
Mar
king
Prin
cipl
es
Th
ese
gene
ral m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
mus
t be
appl
ied
by a
ll ex
amin
ers
whe
n m
arki
ng c
andi
date
ans
wer
s. T
hey
shou
ld b
e ap
plie
d al
ongs
ide
the
spec
ific
cont
ent o
f the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
gen
eric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for a
que
stio
n. E
ach
ques
tion
pape
r and
mar
k sc
hem
e w
ill a
lso
com
ply
with
thes
e m
arki
ng p
rinci
ples
. G
EN
ER
IC M
AR
KIN
G P
RIN
CIP
LE 1
: M
arks
mus
t be
awar
ded
in li
ne w
ith:
• th
e sp
ecifi
c co
nten
t of t
he m
ark
sche
me
or th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e sp
ecifi
c sk
ills
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e or
in th
e ge
neric
leve
l des
crip
tors
for t
he q
uest
ion
• th
e st
anda
rd o
f res
pons
e re
quire
d by
a c
andi
date
as
exem
plifi
ed b
y th
e st
anda
rdis
atio
n sc
ripts
.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
2:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
alw
ays
who
le m
arks
(not
hal
f mar
ks, o
r oth
er fr
actio
ns).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
3:
Mar
ks m
ust b
e aw
arde
d po
sitiv
ely:
•
mar
ks a
re a
war
ded
for c
orre
ct/v
alid
ans
wer
s, a
s de
fined
in th
e m
ark
sche
me.
How
ever
, cre
dit i
s gi
ven
for v
alid
ans
wer
s w
hich
go
beyo
nd th
e sc
ope
of th
e sy
llabu
s an
d m
ark
sche
me,
refe
rrin
g to
you
r Tea
m L
eade
r as
appr
opria
te
• m
arks
are
aw
arde
d w
hen
cand
idat
es c
lear
ly d
emon
stra
te w
hat t
hey
know
and
can
do
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r err
ors
• m
arks
are
not
ded
ucte
d fo
r om
issi
ons
• an
swer
s sh
ould
onl
y be
judg
ed o
n th
e qu
ality
of s
pelli
ng, p
unct
uatio
n an
d gr
amm
ar w
hen
thes
e fe
atur
es a
re s
peci
fical
ly a
sses
sed
by th
e qu
estio
n as
indi
cate
d by
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. T
he m
eani
ng, h
owev
er, s
houl
d be
una
mbi
guou
s.
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
4:
Rul
es m
ust b
e ap
plie
d co
nsis
tent
ly e
.g. i
n si
tuat
ions
whe
re c
andi
date
s ha
ve n
ot fo
llow
ed in
stru
ctio
ns o
r in
the
appl
icat
ion
of g
ener
ic le
vel
desc
ripto
rs.
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
3 of
11
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
5:
Mar
ks s
houl
d be
aw
arde
d us
ing
the
full
rang
e of
mar
ks d
efin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e fo
r the
que
stio
n (h
owev
er; t
he u
se o
f the
full
mar
k ra
nge
may
be
lim
ited
acco
rdin
g to
the
qual
ity o
f the
can
dida
te re
spon
ses
seen
).
GE
NE
RIC
MA
RK
ING
PR
INC
IPLE
6:
Mar
ks a
war
ded
are
base
d so
lely
on
the
requ
irem
ents
as
defin
ed in
the
mar
k sc
hem
e. M
arks
sho
uld
not b
e aw
arde
d w
ith g
rade
thre
shol
ds o
r gr
ade
desc
ripto
rs in
min
d.
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
4 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
Sect
ion
A
1(a)
(i)
Man
y co
rrec
t ans
wer
s, th
ey m
ust b
e m
eani
ngfu
l. Th
e fo
llow
ing
is a
n ex
ampl
e on
ly:
One
mar
k pe
r bul
let p
oint
• D
ata
stru
ctur
e A
rray
•
Nam
e
processor
•
Dat
a ty
pe
st
ring
• U
se
to s
tore
pro
cess
ors
curr
ently
ava
ilabl
e
4
1(a)
(ii)
One
mar
k pe
r bul
let p
oint
• D
ata
stru
ctur
e gi
ven
(1)
• D
ata
type
(1)
• S
ampl
e da
ta (1
) •
Mor
e th
an o
ne d
ata
stru
ctur
e de
scrib
ed (1
) M
any
corr
ect a
nsw
ers,
they
mus
t be
mea
ning
ful.
The
follo
win
g is
an
exam
ple
only
: e.
g. T
hree
arr
ays
cont
aini
ng s
tring
dat
a w
ith n
ame,
add
ress
and
pho
ne n
umbe
r – J
ohn
Sm
ith, C
ambr
idge
, 012
23 1
2345
6
4
1(b)
O
ne m
ark
for m
etho
d, o
ne m
ark
for a
n ex
tens
ion
or re
ason
. M
any
corr
ect a
nsw
ers,
an
exam
ple
is g
iven
. U
se a
pre
viou
sly
stor
ed n
umbe
r//ge
nera
tes/
uses
an
initi
al v
alue
(1)
Upd
ate
it (b
y 1)
eve
ry ti
me
an e
stim
ate
is m
ade
(1)
2
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
5 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(c)
A
ny fi
ve fr
om:
1 In
itial
ise
(sto
ck le
vel)
flag
2 C
heck
sto
ck le
vel f
or th
e ch
osen
pro
cess
or ty
pe
3 O
nly
chec
k R
AM
if p
roce
ssor
ava
ilabl
e //
Onl
y ch
eck
proc
esso
r if R
AM
ava
ilabl
e 4
Che
ck s
tock
leve
l for
the
chos
en ty
pe o
f RA
M
5 Fi
nish
pro
cess
if p
robl
em w
ith (R
AM
/Pro
cess
or) s
tock
leve
ls
6 Id
entif
y ou
t of s
tock
(pro
cess
or/R
AM
)//S
et fl
ag to
app
ropr
iate
val
ue
7 Id
entif
y st
ock
leve
l OK
//Set
flag
to a
ppro
pria
te v
alue
5
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
6 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(c)
S
ampl
e an
swer
: foundProc ← FALSE
count ← 1
WHILE NOT foundProc AND count <=3 DO
IF processor(estNo) = proc(count) AND stProc(count) > 0
THEN
foundProc ← TRUE
ENDIF
count ← count + 1
ENDWHILE
IF foundProc
THEN
foundRAM ← FALSE
IF RAM(estNO) = RAM1 AND stRAM1 >0
THEN
foundRAM ← TRUE
stRAM1 ← stRAM1 - 1
ENDIF
IF RAM(estNO) = RAM2 AND stRAM2 >0
THEN
foundRAM ← TRUE
stRAM2 ← stRAM2 - 1
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF NOT foundProc
THEN
OUTPUT "Processor out of stock"
ELSE
stProc(count) ← stProc(count) - 1
ENDIF
IF NOT foundRAM
THEN
OUTPUT "RAM out of stock"
ENDIF
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
7 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
1(d)
O
ne m
ark
for e
ach
corr
ect p
oint
(max
5):
Exp
lana
tion
1 H
ow th
e nu
mbe
r of o
rder
s w
as c
alcu
late
d 2
Dea
l with
the
case
whe
re th
e es
timat
e ha
s no
t bee
n tu
rned
into
an
orde
r 3
Cal
cula
ting
the
tota
l num
ber o
f eac
h co
mpo
nent
sol
d 4
Det
ails
of m
etho
d ac
tual
ly u
sed
to c
alcu
late
num
bers
of c
ompo
nent
s 5
How
the
tota
l val
ue o
f all
the
orde
rs w
as c
alcu
late
d 6
Dis
play
sum
mar
y 7
Dis
play
com
plet
e su
mm
ary
of n
umbe
r of o
rder
s, to
tal n
umbe
r of c
ompo
nent
s an
d to
tal v
alue
of o
rder
s P
rogr
amm
ing
stat
emen
ts c
an b
e us
ed b
ut m
ust b
e ex
plai
ned
to g
ain
cred
it.
5
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
8 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
Sect
ion
B
2(a)
A
ny s
ix fr
om:
1 In
itial
isat
ion
of c
ount
ers
for p
ositi
ve n
umbe
rs a
nd z
eros
2
App
ropr
iate
loop
for 1
000
itera
tions
3
Inpu
t num
ber i
nsid
e lo
op
4 Te
st fo
r pos
itive
num
bers
5
Upd
ate
posi
tive
num
ber c
ount
er
6 Te
st fo
r zer
os
7 U
pdat
e ze
ro c
ount
er
8 O
utpu
t cou
nter
s w
ith a
ppro
pria
te m
essa
ges
outs
ide
loop
zero ← 0
posCount ← 0
FOR count ← 1 TO 1000
INPUT number
IF number > 0
THEN posCount ← posCount + 1
ENDIF
IF number = 0
THEN zero ← zero + 1
ENDIF
NEXT
OUTPUT posCount, " positive numbers"
OUTPUT zero, " zeros"
6
2(b)
R
educ
e th
e nu
mbe
r of i
tera
tions
to a
man
agea
ble
amou
nt //
Sim
ulat
e th
e in
put (
e.g.
rand
om g
ener
atio
n)
1
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
9 of
11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
3(a)
Dig
it(1)
D
igit(
2)
Dig
it(3)
Dig
it(4)
Dig
it(5)
Dig
it(6)
Dig
it(7)
D
igit(
8)Su
m
OU
TPU
T 5
7 0
1 2
3 4
6 44
G
TIN
-8
57
0123
46
D
igit(
1)
Dig
it(2)
D
igit(
3)D
igit(
4)D
igit(
5)D
igit(
6)D
igit(
7)
Dig
it(8)
Sum
O
UTP
UT
4 3
1 0
2 3
1 0
30
GTI
N-8
43
1023
10
One
mar
k fo
r dat
a en
try –
bot
h se
ts o
f dig
its 1
–7
One
mar
k fo
r bot
h D
igit(
8)
One
mar
k fo
r eac
h S
um (m
ax T
wo)
O
ne m
ark
for b
oth
OU
TPU
T
5
3(b)
A
ny th
ree
from
1
Cha
nge
first
loop
to 8
iter
atio
ns
2 C
heck
that
the
inpu
t Digit(8)
is e
qual
to th
e ca
lcul
ated
Digit(8)…
3
if e
qual
out
put c
heck
dig
it co
rrec
t 4
oth
erw
ise
outp
ut c
heck
dig
it in
corre
ct
Or
1 C
hang
e fir
st lo
op to
8 it
erat
ions
2
Put
all
8 di
gits
thro
ugh
the
algo
rithm
to c
alcu
late
Sum …
3
if MOD(Sum,10)
is e
qual
to z
ero,
che
ck d
igit
corr
ect
4 o
ther
wis
e ou
tput
che
ck d
igit
inco
rrect
3
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
10 o
f 11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
4 O
ne m
ark
for e
ach
(max
thre
e)
10.0
0 bo
unda
ry/e
rron
eous
dat
a //
the
pric
e sh
ould
be
reje
cted
// v
alue
is o
ut o
f ran
ge
9.99
b
ound
ary/
extre
me/
norm
al d
ata
// th
e pr
ices
sho
uld
be a
ccep
ted
// va
lue
is w
ithin
nor
mal
rang
e te
n
erro
neou
s/ab
norm
al d
ata
// in
put s
houl
d be
reje
cted
// v
alue
is w
rong
type
3
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
5 Th
ere
are
man
y po
ssib
le a
nsw
ers.
e.g
.: To
talli
ng is
use
d to
sum
a li
st o
f num
bers
(1)
Cou
ntin
g is
use
d to
find
how
man
y nu
mbe
rs/it
ems
ther
e ar
e in
a li
st. (
1)
Tota
lling
exa
mpl
e (1
) e.g
. Total = Total + Number
C
ount
ing
exam
ple
(1) e
.g. Counter = Counter + 1
4
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(a)
Fi
elds
5 R
ecor
ds
8 2
6(b)
A
ny tw
o fro
m:
Leng
th c
heck
Ty
pe c
heck
P
rese
nce
chec
k Fo
rmat
che
ck
2
0478
/21
Cam
brid
ge IG
CS
E –
Mar
k S
chem
e PU
BLI
SHED
M
ay/J
une
2018
©
UC
LES
201
8 P
age
11 o
f 11
Que
stio
n A
nsw
er
Mar
ks
6(c)
Fiel
d:
Type
S
old
Out
D
ate
Title
Tabl
e:
PE
RFO
RM
AN
CE
P
ER
FOR
MA
NC
E
PE
RFO
RM
AN
CE
P
ER
FOR
MA
NC
E
Sor
t:
Sho
w:
Crit
eria
: Li
ke “J
azz”
Fa
lse
or:
One
mar
k pe
r cor
rect
col
umn.
4
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 7 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22 Paper 2 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 7
Generic Marking Principles
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1: Marks must be awarded in line with: • the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question • the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2: Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3: Marks must be awarded positively: • marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do • marks are not deducted for errors • marks are not deducted for omissions • answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4: Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5: Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6: Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 7
Question Answer Marks
Section A
1(a)(i) Variable name, data type and use one mark, max two Several correct answers, the names chosen must be meaningful. Variables must relate to task 2 Example Name totalMilk Data type integer/real Use to store the total volume of the milk for the week (to the nearest whole litre) (1) Name weeklyAverage Data type integer/real Use to store the average yield per week (1)
2
1(a)(ii) One mark per bullet point. • Data structure(s) given (1) • Data type (1) • Sample data (1) • More than one data structure described (1)
Example A real array for each milking and an array of strings for the identity codes. There would be 14 arrays for the milking e.g. mondayMorning, mondayEvening Sample data for a cow could be 123, 23.5, 22.7
4
1(b) Entering/selecting the identity code (1) method to ensure it is not a duplicate (1) Example Enter new identity code number Check if already in the list of code numbers
2
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 7
Question Answer Marks
1(c) Any five from: 1 Initialisation for total weekly volume 2 loop control 3 calculation of running total for yield 4 calculation of average yield 5 output total and average yield per week with message outside loop 6 value(s) rounded Sample answer total ← 0 FOR counter ← 1 TO numCows total ← total + mondayMorning(counter) total ← total + mondayEvening(counter) total ← total + tuesdayMorning(counter) total ← total + tuesdayEvening (counter) total ← total + wednesdayMorning(counter) total ← total + wednesdayEvening (counter) total ← total + thursdayMorning(counter) total ← total + thursdayEvening (counter) total ← total + fridayMorning(counter) total ← total + fridayEvening (counter) total ← total + saturdayMorning(counter) total ← total + saturdayEvening (counter) total ← total + sundayMorning(counter) total ← total + sundayEvening(counter) NEXT counter Average ← ROUND(total/numCows) OUTPUT "Total volume of milk for week ", ROUND(total) OUTPUT "Average weekly yield ", average
5
1(d)(i) Explanation Any five from: 1 Check each cow 2 Initialise day counter to zero 3 Check every day of the week 4 If daily yield is less than 12 5 add one to day counter 6 If day counter >= 4 7 identify/output identity code number(s)
5
1(d)(ii) Explanation • Add new storage space to store code numbers for example new
array/table/list • Add extra code to store these values if the condition was met
2
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 7
Question Answer Marks
Section B
2(a) One mark per correct pair of actions, process, Input/Output, Tests (apart from START and END) max 3 One mark complete Flowlines, one mark working flowlines, one mark correct use flowchart symbols
6
2(b) Any two from: • Use another counter/variable • Update this counter/variable when the number is less than zero/count all
numbers and subtract the positive numbers • Output this counter/variable at the end // Output both counters at the end
2
START
INPUT Number
Is Number = 0?
Is Number < 0?
Count ← Count + 1
Yes
No
Count ← 0
END
OUTPUT Count, "positive numbers"
No
Yes
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 7
Question Answer Marks
3(a)
Number1 Number2 Sign Answer OUTPUT 5 7 + 12 12
6 2 - 4 4
4 3 * 12 12
7 8 ? 0
0 0 / (0)
1 mark 1 mark 1 mark
3
3(b) CASE Sign OF ENDCASE (1) List +, -, *, / with correct assignments (1) OTHERWISE Answer ← 0 (1) Example CASE Sign OF ꞌ+ꞌ : Answer ← Number1 + Number2 ꞌ-ꞌ : Answer ← Number1 - Number2 ꞌ*ꞌ : Answer ← Number1 * Number2 ꞌ/ꞌ : Answer ← Number1 / Number2 OTHERWISE Answer ← 0 ENDCASE
3
Question Answer Marks
4(a) Max 4 in total Any 3 from:
• To ensure no changes are made on input / accuracy of transcription • Because the details do not have fixed, values or lengths to validate • Because there is no clear set of rules that can be used for validation
Any 3 from:
• The programmer could ask the contributor to type in each detail twice • and then check that both values are equal • If they are not equal then the input should be rejected • The programmer could ask the contributor to check the details on the
screen • and confirm that they are correct / same as the original • or change them
4
4(b) One mark for email and one mark for password Email – check for @ / format check / no spaces /valid characters // presence check // length check (not more than 254 characters) // uniqueness check Password – length check / numbers and letters etc. // uniqueness check not been used before // presence check
2
0478/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 7
Question Answer Marks
5 One mark per value and reason, max 3 Example 1.00 – boundary rejected//rejected (underweight) // out of range(1) 1.02 – normal // valid // accepted weight in range (1) 1.10 – abnormal // erroneous // invalid // rejected (overweight) (1)
3
Question Answer Marks
6(a) Fields 5 1
6(b) One mark description of new code that will allow more than 1000 values One mark for example matching candidate’s description Example Use a new character instead of N TT345
2
6(c)
Field: At Risk Age in Years Type Map Position
Table: TREES TREES TREES TREES
Sort:
Show:
Criteria: True >100
or: One mark per correct column
4
IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 8 printed pages.
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge Assessment International Education Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23 Paper 2 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 50
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes. Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level components.
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 8
Generic Marking Principles
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1: Marks must be awarded in line with: • the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question • the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2: Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3: Marks must be awarded positively: • marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do • marks are not deducted for errors • marks are not deducted for omissions • answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4: Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5: Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6: Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 8
Question Answer Marks
Section A
1(a)(i) One mark for any meaningful array name related to Task 1 × 2 e.g. Tickets EntryTime One mark for correct data type AND use related to Task 1 × 2 e.g.
integer to store the ticket numbers real to store the entry times
4
1(a)(ii) One mark for any meaningful name for a constant AND value related to Task 3 × 2 e.g. MaxTime 8 MaxFine 100 One mark for correct use related to Task 3 × 2 e.g.
to store the maximum number of hours allowed in the car park to store the current value of the fine for staying too long (in $)
4
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 8
Question Answer Marks
1(b) Any six from: • Initialisation of ticket numbers and arrays • Loop for day’s transactions • Check for entry • Output of free spaces before entry • Suitable input prompts to select on entry • Relevant Inputs (to get ticket and to input time) • Recording of entry time and ticket number in arrays • Generate next ticket number • Update and display number of car park spaces available after entry
Ticket_Number ← 1 //This number would not reset each day Ticket_Array[1:100] Entry_Time[1:100] Spaces ← 100 Count ← 1 //This number would reset each day WHILE Count > 1 DO OUTPUT "Available Spaces" Spaces INPUT "Press enter to get ticket", Entry OUTPUT "Next Ticket Number", Ticket_Number INPUT "Current time", Current_Time Ticket_Array[Count] ← Ticket_Number Entry_Time[Count] ← Current_Time Ticket_Number ← Ticket_Number + 1 Spaces ← Spaces – 1 Count ← Count + 1 ENDWHILE
6
1(c) Any four from: • Explanation of how the checking of the length of stay was done • Correct comparison to check length of stay against maximum • Explanation of how the extra charge is calculated • Correct calculation to work out the regular parking charge • Explanation of suitable output to show parking charge and extra
charge if appropriate
4
1(d) One mark for each correct test data item and related reason for Task 1 (Answers MUST relate to pre-release task) e.g. Test data: –102 Reason: To check that negative values for ticket numbers are rejected Test data: 85 Reason: To check that normal ticket number data is accepted
2
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 8
Question Answer Marks
Section B
2(a) One mark for description one mark for example e.g. To test if the data entered is possible / reasonable
A range check tests that data entered fits within specified values. Allow any correct validation check as an example
2
2(b) One mark for description one mark for example e.g. To test if the data input is the same as the data that was intended to be input
A double entry check expects each item of data to be entered twice and compares both entries to check they are the same. Allow any correct verification check as an example
2
Question Answer Marks
3 One mark for each correct answer Counter = 0 FOR Count = 1 TO 30 Total = Total + Number NEXT Count
4
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 8
Question Answer Marks
4(a) Any two from: • Expects a number to be input • Checks if the number is greater than 100 • Outputs the result of the test • Specific output example
2
4(b)(i) One mark for correct answer e.g. Use a (condition controlled) loop
1
4(b)(ii) One mark for each point • Initialisation of Number variable • Correct loop statements • Correct INPUT and OUTPUT
e.g. INPUT Number WHILE Number > 100 DO OUTPUT ″The number is too large″ INPUT Number ENDWHILE OUTPUT ″The number is acceptable″
or INPUT Number REPEAT IF Number > 100 THEN OUTPUT ″The number is too large″ ENDIF INPUT Number UNTIL Number <= 100 OUTPUT ″The number is acceptable″
3
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 8
Question Answer Marks
5(a)
Max Counter Num OUTPUT
–1000.00 0 6.30
6.30 1 18.62
18.62 2 50.01
50.01 3 3.13
50.01 4 2.05
50.01 5 50.10
50.10 6 40.35
50.10 7 30.69
50.10 8 0.85
50.10 9 17.30
50.10 10 50.10
1 mark 1 mark 1 mark
3
5(b) One mark for each correct change (max two) Box 2 Change the initialization value of the current ‘Max’ variable to
a very high number Box 4 Change the inequality from > to < Boxes 2, 4, 5, 8 Change the Max variable to something more suitable e.g. Min
2
Question Answer Marks
6(a) One mark for correct answer 20
1
6(b)(i) One mark for correct answer CatNo
1
6(b)(ii) One mark for correct answer It is a unique identifier
1
0478/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme PUBLISHED
May/June 2018
© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 8
Question Answer Marks
6(c) One mark for every two correct data types
Field Data Type
CatNo Text
Title Text
Genre 1 Text
Stream Boolean / Text
2
6(d) One mark for each correct row 18m02 Golfwatch Yes No Yes
18m03 Chair 27 Yes Yes No Accept if drawn in a table, but don’t allow any punctuation
2
6(e)
Field: CatNo Title Genre 1 Genre 2 Stream
Table: 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV
Sort: Ascending
Show:
Criteria: =”Sci-Fi” Yes
or: =”Sci-Fi” Yes
1 mark 1 mark 1 mark 1 mark
One mark per completely correct column / group of columns as shown.
4
*5852353658*
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (NF) 148542/1© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been receivedat the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/21/PRE/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
A computer shop will build a computer from components to meet a customer’s requirements. For each request for a computer to be built, an estimate of the cost is produced. The component stock level is checked; if all the components are in stock, a firm order to build the computer can be placed. A program is required to work out the cost of the computer, update the stock levels and provide a daily summary of orders for the shop owner.
Write and test a program or programs for the computer shop owner.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Produce an estimate.
Write a program for TASK 1 to calculate the cost of building a computer using these components:
Component Choices Prices in $
Processor p3 / p5 / p7 100 / 120 / 200
RAM 16 GB / 32 GB 75 / 150
Storage 1 TB / 2 TB 50 / 100
Screen 19" / 23" 65 / 120
Case Mini Tower / Midi Tower 40 / 70
USB ports 2 ports / 4 ports 10 / 20
The customer makes a choice for each component and an estimate is produced. The estimate must show a unique estimate number, the components chosen and the price of each component. The estimate must also show the total cost of the computer, which is calculated as the sum of the cost of the components chosen plus 20%.
TASK 2 – Place an order.
Using your estimate from TASK 1, check if the components required are in stock. If all the components are in stock then update the stock levels. Add the unique estimate number to the list of order numbers. Add the customer’s details and today’s date to the estimate details to finalise the order. Print two copies of the order, one for the customer and one for the shop.
TASK 3 –Summarise the day’s orders.
Extend TASK 2 to provide an end of day summary showing the number of orders made, the total number of each component sold and the value of the orders.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (NH) 148632/2© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
*0032183648*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been received at the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
2
0478/22/PRE/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
A farmer records the milk production of a herd of cows. Every cow has a unique 3-digit identity code. Each cow can be milked twice a day, seven days a week. The volume of milk from each cow is recorded in litres correct to one decimal place (yield) every time the cow is milked. The size of the herd is fixed. At the end of the week the total and the average yield for each cow for that week is calculated.
The farmer identifies the cow that has produced the most milk that week. The farmer also identifies any cows that have produced less than 12 litres of milk on four or more days that week.
A program is required to record the yield for each cow every time it is milked, calculate the total weekly volume of milk for the herd and the average yield per cow in a week. The program must also identify the cow with the best yield that week and identify any cows with a yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four or more days that week.
Write and test a program or programs for the farmer.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Record the yield.
Write a program for TASK 1 to record the milk yields for a week. The program records and stores the identity code number and the yield every time a cow is milked.
TASK 2 – Calculate the statistics.
Using your recorded data from TASK 1, calculate and display the total weekly volume of milk for the herd to the nearest whole litre. Calculate and display the average yield per cow in a week to the nearest whole litre.
TASK 3 – Identify the most productive cow and cows that are producing a low volume of milk.
Extend TASK 2 to identify and display the identity code number and weekly yield of the cow that has produced the most milk. Also identify and display the identity code numbers of any cows with a yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four days or more in the week.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
This document consists of 2 printed pages.
DC (NH) 148634/3© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
*5658253681*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018PRE-RELEASE MATERIALNo Additional Materials are required.This material should be given to the relevant teachers and candidates as soon as it has been received at the Centre.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Candidates should use this material in preparation for the examination. Candidates should attempt the practical programming tasks using their chosen high-level, procedural programming language.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
2
0478/23/PRE/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
In preparation for the examination candidates should attempt the following practical tasks by writing and testing a program or programs.
A car park has space for 100 cars and a barrier entrance and exit system. There is a display at the entrance to show how many spaces are empty. Cars are issued a ticket with a unique number on entry and the time of issue is stored. The car park charges $1.50 per hour and the fee is paid at a machine before leaving the car park. At the machine, the ticket number and departure time are entered; the fee is calculated by the machine and the amount due is paid by the ticket holder. Cars cannot stay overnight; the system is reset at midnight.
Write and test a program or programs for the car park manager.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Operating the car park.
The system is reset at midnight every day.Set up a system using arrays and with suitable prompts that will carry out the following as cars enter or leave the car park:
On Entry:• display the number of empty car park spaces• issue the next available ticket number• store the current time and the ticket number• display the updated number of empty car park spaces.
On Exit:• input a ticket number and departure time• output the amount of time the car stayed at the car park• delete the ticket number from the array• display the updated number of empty car park spaces.
TASK 2 – Working out the cost and daily takings.
Amend the program so that it will calculate the amount to be paid using a charge of $1.50 per hour, or part of an hour (i.e. any amount of time into the next hour is charged for a whole hour). The amount to be paid is displayed and is added to a running total for the day, before the ticket number is deleted from the array. At the end of the day, the following information is displayed:• total daily takings• number of cars that have used the car park• average charge per car• average length of stay per car.
TASK 3 – Introducing parking restrictions.
The car park manager decides to restrict the length of stay to a maximum of eight hours, and will charge an extra $100 if a car overstays. Modify your program to implement this change and ensure the driver is aware of this extra charge. Output the number of cars that have overstayed in a day.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
*2772106825*
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SR/SW) 163639/3 R© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/11Paper 1 Theory May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
Any businesses described in this paper are entirely fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
2
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
1 Jane answers an examination question about computers and data correctly. Six different words or numbers have been removed from her answer.
Complete the sentences in Jane’s answer, using the list given. Not all items in the list need to be used.
• 2• 10• 16• analogue• binary• denary• digital• hexadecimal
As humans, we process …………………………………… data, but a computer cannot
process this type of data. For a computer to be able to process data it needs to be
converted to …………………………………… data. As humans, we mostly use a …………………………………… number system;
this is a base …………………………………… number system.
Computers use a …………………………………… number system;
this is a base …………………………………… number system. [6]
2 Dheeraj identifies three hexadecimal numbers.
Write the denary number for each of the three hexadecimal numbers:
2A ....................................................................................................
101 ...................................................................................................
21E ..................................................................................................
[3]
Working Space
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
3
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
3 The three binary numbers in the registers A, B and C have been transmitted from one computer to another.
Parity bit
Register A 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Register B 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Register C 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
One binary number has been transmitted incorrectly. This is identified through the use of a parity bit.
Identify which register contains the binary number that has been transmitted incorrectly. Explain the reason for your choice.
The binary number that has been transmitted incorrectly is in Register ..........................................
Explanation ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
4
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
4 Michele wants to email a file to Elsa. The file is too large so it must be compressed.
(a) Name two types of compression that Michele could use.
Compression type 1 ..................................................................................................................
Compression type 2 .................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The file Michele is sending contains the source code for a large computer program.
Identify which type of compression would be most suitable for Michele to use.
Explain your choice.
Compression type ......................................................................................................................
Explanation ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
5
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
5 Six components of the Von Neumann model for a computer system and six descriptions are given.
Draw a line to match each component to the most suitable description.
Component
Immediate access store
(IAS)
Register
Accumulator (ACC)
Bus
Control unit (CU)
Arithmetic logic unit (ALU)
Description
Holds data and instructions when they are loaded from main memory and are waiting
to be processed.
Holds data temporarily that is currently being used in a calculation.
Manages the flow of data and interaction between the components of the processor.
Pathway for transmitting data and instructions.
Holds data or instructions temporarily when they are being processed.
Carries out the calculations on data.
[5]
6
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
6 Consider the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is NOT 1 OR B is 1) NOR C is 1) NAND ((A is 1 AND C is 1) NOR B is 1)
(a) Draw a logic circuit to represent the given logic statement.
A
B
C
X
[6]
(b) Complete the truth table for the given logic statement.
A B CWorking space
X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[4]
7
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
7 Translators, such as a compiler and an interpreter, are used when writing and running computer programs.
Describe how a compiler and an interpreter translates a computer program.
Compiler ...........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Interpreter .........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
8
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
8 A supermarket uses a barcode scanner to read the barcodes on its products.
(a) Describe how the barcode scanner reads the barcode.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Explain how the barcode system could help the supermarket manage its stock.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) An infrared touch screen is used to view and navigate the supermarket stock system.
Explain how the infrared touch screen detects a user’s touch.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
9
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(d) The supermarket uses secondary storage and off-line storage to store data about its stock.
Explain what is meant by secondary storage and off-line storage.
Secondary storage ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Off-line storage .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
9 A business wants to use a biometric security system to control entry to the office.
The system will use a biometric device and a microprocessor.
Explain how the biometric security system will make use of the biometric device and the microprocessor to control entry to the office.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
10
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
10 RockICT is a music business that has a website to allow customers to view and buy the products it sells.
The website consists of web pages.
(a) Describe what is meant by HTML structure and presentation for a web page.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) The URL for the music company’s website is:
https://www.rockict.net/index.htmPart 2Part 1
(i) Identify what Part 1 and Part 2 represent in this URL.
Part 1 ................................................................................................................................
Part 2 ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe what is meant by https.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
11
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(c) When a customer enters the website, a message is displayed:
“RockICT makes use of cookies. By continuing to browse you are agreeing to our use of cookies.”
Explain why the music company uses cookies.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The music company is concerned about the security of its website.
The company uses a proxy server as part of its security system.
Describe the role of a proxy server in the security system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
12
0478/11/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
*8003295921*
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SC/SW) 150229/2© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/12Paper 1 Theory May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
Any businesses described in this paper are entirely fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
1 Different units of data can be used to represent the size of a file, as it changes in size.
Fill in the missing units of data, using the list given:
• byte• gigabyte (GB)• megabyte (MB)• nibble
The units of data increase in size from smallest to largest.
Smallest bit
………………………………………………..
………………………………………………..
kilobyte (kB)
………………………………………………..
………………………………………………..
Largest terabyte (TB)
[4]
2 (a) Nancy has captured images of her holiday with her camera. The captured images are stored as digital photo files on her camera.
Explain how the captured images are converted to digital photo files.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
3
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) Nancy wants to email the photos to Nadia.
Many of the photos are very large files, so Nancy needs to reduce their file size as much as possible.
Identify which type of compression would be most suitable for Nancy to use. Explain your choice.
Compression type .....................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
3 A stopwatch uses six digits to display hours, minutes and seconds.
The stopwatch is stopped at:
0 2 3 1 5 8Hours Minutes Seconds
An 8-bit register is used to store each pair of digits.
(a) Write the 8-bit binary numbers that are currently stored for the Hours, Minutes and Seconds.
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
[3]
4
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(b) The stopwatch is started again and then stopped.
When the watch is stopped, the 8-bit binary registers show:
Hours 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Minutes 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Seconds 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
Write the denary values that will now be shown on the stopwatch.
Hours Minutes Seconds
[3]
4 Jafar is using the Internet when he gets the message:
“D03, page is not available”
Jafar remembers that hexadecimal is often used to represent binary values in error codes.
Convert the hexadecimal number in the error message into 12-bit binary.
[3]
5
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
5 The three binary numbers in the registers X, Y and Z have been transmitted from one computer to another.
Parity bit
Register X 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Register Y 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Register Z 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Only one binary number has been transmitted correctly. This is identified through the use of a parity bit.
Identify which register contains the binary number that has been transmitted correctly. Explain the reason for your choice.
The binary number that has been transmitted correctly is in Register ............................................
Explanation ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
6
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
6 Kelvin correctly answers an examination question about the Von Neumann model.
Eight different terms have been removed from his answer.
Complete the sentences in Kelvin’s answer, using the list given.
Not all items in the list need to be used.
• accumulator (ACC)• address bus• arithmetic logic unit (ALU)• control unit (CU)• data bus• executed• fetches• immediate access store (IAS)• memory address register (MAR)• memory data register (MDR)• program counter (PC)• saved• transmits
The central processing unit (CPU) ....................................................................................
the data and instructions needed and stores them in the
.................................................................................... to wait to be processed.
The .................................................................................... holds the address of the next
instruction. This address is sent to the .................................................................................... .
The data from this address is sent to the .................................................................................... .
The instruction can then be decoded and .................................................................................... .
Any calculations that are carried out on the data are done by the
.................................................................................... . During calculations, the data is temporarily
held in a register called the .................................................................................... . [8]
7
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
7 Consider the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 AND B is NOT 1) NAND C is 1) XOR ((A is 1 AND C is 1) OR B is 1)
(a) Draw a logic circuit to represent the given logic statement.
A
B X
C
[6]
(b) Complete the truth table for the given logic statement.
A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[4]
8
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
8 Dimitri is writing a computer program in a high-level language.
He needs to send just the machine code for the program to his friend, electronically.
It is important that the program is executed as quickly as possible.
Identify which translator will be most suitable for Dimitri to use. Explain your choice.
Type of translator .............................................................................................................................
Explanation ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
9 An advertisement in a magazine displays this barcode:
(a) Identify this type of barcode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain how the data stored in this barcode is read.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
9
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
10 Alexandra has a new mobile device.
It has a touch screen that uses capacitive technology.
(a) Describe how a capacitive touch screen registers Alexandra’s touch.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Alexandra is wearing gloves because it is cold.
She presses an icon on her touch screen but her action is not registered.
(i) Explain why the touch screen will not register her touch.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Alexandra does not want to remove her gloves.
Explain how Alexandra could use her mobile device whilst still wearing gloves.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
11 A factory uses a security system to control a security light. The system uses a sensor and a microprocessor.
Explain how the security system makes use of the sensor and the microprocessor to control the security light.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [6]
11
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
12 (a) Selma has some important personal information that she needs to email to her employer.
She wants to make sure that if the personal information is intercepted, it cannot be understood.
(i) State how Selma could email her personal data more securely.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how your chosen solution works.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Selma wants to make sure that the information received is correct.
A parity check can be used to detect errors.
Describe another error detection method that can be used to check the information received is correct.
Error detection method .............................................................................................................
Description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
12
0478/12/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
*0557422193*
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SC/CGW) 148529/3© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/13Paper 1 Theory May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
Any businesses described in this paper are entirely fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 75.
2
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
1 State five sensors that could be used in the following applications.
Give a different type of sensor for each application.
Application Sensor
Weighing a baby in a hospital
Turning off a kettle when the water boils
Controlling an automatic door
Monitoring the air quality in an aeroplane
Counting cars crossing a bridge
[5]
2 Draw a line to connect each term to the correct application.
Term Application
A telephone that can receive and transmit audio signals simultaneously.
A two-way radio (walkie-talkie) that can receive and transmit messages, but not at the same time.
Simplex
Duplex
Half-duplex A microphone that transmits data to a MIDI system.
[2]
3
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
3 Three security issues that could affect users online are phishing, pharming and spam.
Explain what is meant by each security issue.
Phishing ...........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pharming ..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Spam ................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [6]
4
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
4 A company transmits data to external storage at the end of each day.
(a) Parity checks can be used to check for errors during data transmission.
The system uses odd parity.
(i) Tick (✓) to show for each of the received bytes whether they have been transmitted correctly or transmitted incorrectly.
Received byte Transmitted correctly
(✓)
Transmitted incorrectly
(✓)
10001011
10101110
01011101
00100101
[4]
(ii) State one other method that could be used to check for transmission errors.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Data can be transferred using parallel or serial data transmission.
(i) Describe what is meant by parallel data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one application of parallel data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
5
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(iii) Explain why serial data transmission is normally used for transferring data over a long distance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Data transferred over a network is encrypted to improve data security.
The system uses 64-bit symmetric encryption.
(i) Explain how encryption improves data security.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain one method that could be used to increase the level of security provided by the encryption.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
6
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
5 (a) Convert the denary number 107 to binary.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Represent the denary number 300 as it would be stored in a 12-bit binary register.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Convert the denary number 179 to hexadecimal.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
6 One of the roles of an operating system is to deal with interrupts.
(a) Explain the term interrupt.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Identify three devices that make use of interrupts.
Device 1 ....................................................................................................................................
Device 2 ....................................................................................................................................
Device 3 .................................................................................................................................... [3]
7
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
7 A train station uses large touch screens to allow passengers to search for train information and buy tickets.
(a) State three benefits of using a touch screen in the train station.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 3 ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The touch screens at the station use resistive touch technology.
Describe how resistive touch technology works.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
8
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
8 A logic circuit is shown below.
A
XB
C
(a) Complete the truth table for the given logic circuit.
A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[4]
9
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) Draw a logic circuit corresponding to this logic statement:
X = 1 if (A is NOT 1) OR ((B is 1 OR C is 1) AND (B is NOT 1 OR A is NOT 1))
A
B
C
X
[6]
9 Three types of translators are assemblers, compilers and interpreters.
Tick (✓) the appropriate boxes to show which statements apply to each type of translator.
Statement Assembler(✓)
Compiler(✓)
Interpreter(✓)
Translates high-level language into machine code
Provides error diagnostics
Translates whole program to object code in one operation
Translates and executes one line of code at a time
[3]
10
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
10 Explain how an instruction is fetched in a computer based on the Von Neumann model.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [6]
11 Identify three similarities between CDs and DVDs.
1 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
3 .......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [3]
11
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
12 An image is to be stored electronically.
The image is 256 pixels high by 200 pixels wide with a 16-bit colour depth.
Calculate the file size of the image. You must show all of your working.
File size ................................................................................. kB [3]
13 Describe the role of an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [6]
12
0478/13/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
*1819492409*
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NF) 148543/2© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/21Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
2
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
A computer shop will build a computer from components to meet a customer’s requirements. For each request for a computer to be built, an estimate of the cost is produced. The component stock level is checked; if all the components are in stock, a firm order to build the computer can be placed. A program is required to work out the cost of the computer, update the stock levels and provide a daily summary of orders for the shop owner.
Write and test a program or programs for the computer shop owner.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Produce an estimate.
Write a program for TASK 1 to calculate the cost of building a computer using these components.
Component Choices Prices in $
Processor p3 / p5 / p7 100 / 120 / 200
RAM 16 GB / 32 GB 75 / 150
Storage 1 TB / 2 TB 50 / 100
Screen 19" / 23" 65 / 120
Case Mini Tower / Midi Tower 40 / 70
USB ports 2 ports / 4 ports 10 / 20
The customer makes a choice for each component and an estimate is produced. The estimate must show a unique estimate number, the components chosen and the price of each component. The estimate must also show the total cost of the computer, which is calculated as the sum of the cost of the components chosen plus 20%.
TASK 2 – Place an order.
Using your estimate from TASK 1, check if the components required are in stock. If all the components are in stock then update the stock levels. Add the unique estimate number to the list of order numbers. Add the customer’s details and today’s date to the estimate details to finalise the order. Print two copies of the order, one for the customer and one for the shop.
TASK 3 – Summarise the day’s orders.
Extend TASK 2 to provide an end of day summary showing the number of orders made, the total number of each component sold and the value of the orders.
3
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) You recorded information for the estimate of the cost of building a computer in Task 1. Give a data structure that you created for Task 1, its name, data type and use.
Data structure ....................................................................................................................
Name .................................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) Describe the data structures that you have used in Task 2 to record the customer details. Include sample data in the description.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Explain how your program for Task 1 produces a unique estimate number.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
4
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(c) Write an algorithm for part of Task 2 to check that the chosen processor and chosen RAM are in stock, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart. Assume that Task 1 has been completed. Do not check the other components or produce the order.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
5
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(d) Explain how your program completes Task 3. Any programming statements used in your answer must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
6
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section B
2 (a) Write an algorithm to input 1000 numbers. Count how many numbers are positive and how many numbers are zero. Then output the results. Use either pseudocode or a flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
7
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) Give one change you could make to your algorithm to ensure initial testing is more manageable.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Question 3 starts on page 8.
8
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
3 The global trade item number (GTIN-8) barcode has seven digits and a check digit. This pseudocode algorithm inputs seven digits and calculates the eighth digit, then outputs the
GTIN-8. DIV(X,Y), finds the number of divides in division for example DIV(23,10) is 2. MOD(X,Y), finds the remainder in division for example MOD(23,10) is 3.
FOR Count 1 TO 7 INPUT Number Digit(Count) Number NEXT Sum (Digit(1)+Digit(3)+Digit(5)+Digit(7))*3+Digit(2)+Digit(4)+Digit(6) IF MOD(Sum,10) <> 0 THEN Digit(8) DIV(Sum,10)*10 + 10 - Sum ELSE Digit(8) 0 ENDIF OUTPUT "GTIN-8" FOR Count 1 TO 8 OUTPUT Digit(Count) NEXT
(a) Complete the trace table for the input data: 5, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Digit(1) Digit(2) Digit(3) Digit(4) Digit(5) Digit(6) Digit(7) Digit(8) Sum OUTPUT
Complete the trace table for the input data: 4, 3, 1, 0, 2, 3, 1
Digit(1) Digit(2) Digit(3) Digit(4) Digit(5) Digit(6) Digit(7) Digit(8) Sum OUTPUT
[5]
9
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) Explain how you would change the algorithm to input eight digits (seven digits and the check digit) and output if the check digit entered is correct or not.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
Question 4 starts on page 10.
10
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
4 A programmer has written a routine to check that prices are below $10.00. These values are used as test data.
10.00 9.99 ten
Explain why each value was chosen.
10.00 ................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
9.99 ..................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
ten ....................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................[3]
5 Explain the difference between the programming concepts of counting and totalling. Include an example of a programming statement for each concept in your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [4]
11
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
6 A database table, PERFORMANCE, is used to keep a record of the performances at a local theatre.
Show Number Type Title Date Sold Out
SN091 Comedy An Evening at Home 01 Sept Yes
SN102 Drama Old Places 02 Oct No
SN113 Jazz Acoustic Evening 03 Nov No
SN124 Classical Mozart Evening 04 Dec Yes
SN021 Classical Bach Favourites 01 Feb Yes
SN032 Jazz 30 Years of Jazz 02 Mar Yes
SN043 Comedy Street Night 03 Apr No
SN054 Comedy Hoot 04 May No
(a) State the number of fields and records in the table.
Fields ........................................................................................................................................
Records ....................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Give two validation checks that could be performed on the Show Number field.
Validation check 1 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Validation check 2 .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Using the query-by-example grid, write a query to identify jazz performances that are not sold out. Only display the date and the title.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[4]
12
0478/21/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NH) 148633/2© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
*7115246253*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/22Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
2
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
A farmer records the milk production of a herd of cows. Every cow has a unique 3-digit identity code. Each cow can be milked twice a day, seven days a week. The volume of milk from each cow is recorded in litres correct to one decimal place (yield) every time the cow is milked. The size of the herd is fixed. At the end of the week the total and the average yield for each cow for that week is calculated.
The farmer identifies the cow that has produced the most milk that week. The farmer also identifies any cows that have produced less than 12 litres of milk on four or more days that week.
A program is required to record the yield for each cow every time it is milked, calculate the total weekly volume of milk for the herd and the average yield per cow in a week. The program must also identify the cow with the best yield that week and identify any cows with a yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four or more days that week.
Write and test a program or programs for the farmer.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data.• Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably.• All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Record the yield.
Write a program for TASK 1 to record the milk yields for a week. The program records and stores the identity code number and the yield every time a cow is milked.
TASK 2 – Calculate the statistics.
Using your recorded data from TASK 1, calculate and display the total weekly volume of milk for the herd to the nearest whole litre. Calculate and display the average yield per cow in a week to the nearest whole litre.
TASK 3 – Identify the most productive cow and cows that are producing a low volume of milk.
Extend TASK 2 to identify and display the identity code number and weekly yield of the cow that has produced the most milk. Also identify and display the identity code numbers of any cows with a yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four days or more in the week.
3
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) State the name, the data type and the use of two variables that you have used in Task 2.
Variable 1 name ................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
Variable 2 name ................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use .................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe, with the aid of some sample data, the data structures that you have used to record the data for the cows in Task 1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain how your program for Task 1 ensures that each 3-digit identity code is unique.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
4
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(c) Write an algorithm for Task 2, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart. Assume that Task 1 has been completed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
5
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(d) (i) Explain how your program for Task 3 finds the cows with a daily yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four days or more in the week. Any programming statements used in your answer must be fully explained.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
(ii) Explain how you would extend your program for Task 3 to store the identity code number(s) of those cows with a yield of less than 12 litres of milk for four days or more in the week.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
6
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section B
2 (a) Draw a flowchart for an algorithm to input numbers. Reject any numbers that are negative and count how many numbers are positive. When the number zero is input, the process ends and the count of positive numbers is output.
[6]
7
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(b) Explain the changes you will make to your algorithm to also count the negative numbers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Question 3 starts on Page 8.
8
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
3 This pseudocode algorithm inputs two non-zero numbers and a sign, and then performs the calculation shown by the sign. An input of zero for the first number terminates the process.
INPUT Number1, Number2, Sign WHILE Number1 <> 0 IF Sign = '+' THEN Answer Number1 + Number2 ENDIF IF Sign = '-' THEN Answer Number1 - Number2 ENDIF IF Sign = '*' THEN Answer Number1 * Number2 ENDIF IF Sign = '/' THEN Answer Number1 / Number2 ENDIF IF Sign <> '/' AND Sign <> '*' AND Sign <> '-' AND Sign <> '+' THEN Answer 0 ENDIF IF Answer <> 0 THEN OUTPUT Answer ENDIF INPUT Number1, Number2, Sign ENDWHILE
(a) Complete the trace table for the input data: 5, 7, +, 6, 2, –, 4, 3, *, 7, 8, ?, 0, 0, /
Number1 Number2 Sign Answer OUTPUT
[3]
(b) Show how you could improve the algorithm written in pseudocode by writing an alternative type of conditional statement in pseudocode.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
9
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
4 A programmer has written a routine to store the name, email address and password of a contributor to a website’s discussion group.
(a) The programmer has chosen to verify the name, email address and password.
Explain why verification was chosen and describe how the programmer would verify this data.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) The programmer has also decided to validate the email address and the password.
Describe validation checks that could be used.
Email address ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Password ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
5 A program checks that the weight of a basket of fruit is over 1.00 kilograms and under 1.10 kilograms. Weights are recorded to an accuracy of two decimal places and any weight not in this form has already been rejected.
Give three weights as test data and for each weight state a reason for choosing it. All your reasons must be different.
Weight 1 ............................................................................................................................................
Reason ..............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Weight 2 ............................................................................................................................................
Reason ..............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Weight 3 ............................................................................................................................................
Reason ..............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [3]
11
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
6 A database table, TREES, is used to keep a record of the trees in a park. Each tree is given a unique number and is examined to see if it is at risk of dying. There are over 900 trees; part of the database table is shown.
Tree Number Type Map Position Age in Years At Risk
TN091 Acacia A7 250 Y
TN172 Olive C5 110 N
TN913 Cedar B9 8 N
TN824 Banyan A3 50 Y
TN021 Pine D5 560 Y
TN532 Teak C8 76 Y
TN043 Yew B1 340 N
TN354 Spruce D4 65 N
TN731 Elm B10 22 Y
TN869 Oak C9 13 N
TN954 Pine E11 3 N
(a) State the number of fields in the table.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The tree numbering system uses TN followed by three digits. The numbering system will not work if there are over 1000 trees.
Describe, with the aid of an example, how you could change the tree numbering system to allow for over 1000 trees. Existing tree numbers must not be changed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Using the query-by-example grid, write a query to identify at risk trees over 100 years old. Display only the type and the position on the map.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[4]
12
0478/22/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NH/FC) 148635/3© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
*0574821219*
COMPUTER SCIENCE 0478/23Paper 2 Problem-solving and Programming May/June 2018 1 hour 45 minutesCandidates answer on the Question Paper.No Additional Materials are required.No calculators allowed.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.Write in dark blue or black pen.You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TASKS 1, 2 AND 3 in the pre-release material; these are for information only.
You are advised to spend no more than 40 minutes on Section A (Question 1).
No marks will be awarded for using brand names of software packages or hardware.
Any businesses described in this paper are entirely fictitious.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The maximum number of marks is 50.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Cambridge International ExaminationsCambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
2
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section A
You are advised to spend no longer than 40 minutes answering this section.
Here is a copy of the pre-release material.
DO NOT attempt Tasks 1, 2 and 3 now.
Use the pre-release material and your experience from attempting the tasks before the examination to answer Question 1.
Pre-release material
A car park has space for 100 cars and a barrier entrance and exit system. There is a display at the entrance to show how many spaces are empty. Cars are issued a ticket with a unique number on entry and the time of issue is stored. The car park charges $1.50 per hour and the fee is paid at a machine before leaving the car park. At the machine, the ticket number and departure time are entered; the fee is calculated by the machine and the amount due is paid by the ticket holder. Cars cannot stay overnight; the system is reset at midnight.
Write and test a program or programs for the car park manager.
• Your program or programs must include appropriate prompts for the entry of data. • Error messages and other output need to be set out clearly and understandably. • All variables, constants and other identifiers must have meaningful names.
You will need to complete these three tasks. Each task must be fully tested.
TASK 1 – Operating the car park.
The system is reset at midnight every day.Set up a system using arrays and with suitable prompts that will carry out the following as cars enter or leave the car park:
On Entry:• display the number of empty car park spaces• issue the next available ticket number• store the current time and the ticket number• display the updated number of empty car park spaces.
On Exit:• input a ticket number and departure time• output the amount of time the car stayed at the car park• delete the ticket number from the array• display the updated number of empty car park spaces.
TASK 2 – Working out the cost and daily takings.
Amend the program so that it will calculate the amount to be paid using a charge of $1.50 per hour, or part of an hour (i.e. any amount of time into the next hour is charged for a whole hour). The amount to be paid is displayed and is added to a running total for the day, before the ticket number is deleted from the array. At the end of the day, the following information is displayed:• total daily takings• number of cars that have used the car park• average charge per car• average length of stay per car.
TASK 3 – Introducing parking restrictions.
The car park manager decides to restrict the length of stay to a maximum of eight hours, and will charge an extra $100 if a car overstays. Modify your program to implement this change and ensure the driver is aware of this extra charge. Output the number of cars that have overstayed in a day.
3
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
1 (a) All variables, constants and other identifiers should have meaningful names.
(i) State the name, data type and use of two arrays you created for Task 1.
Array 1 name .....................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Array 2 name .....................................................................................................................
Data type ...........................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) State the name, value and use of two constants you could have created for Task 3.
Constant 1 name ................................................................................................................
Value .................................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Constant 2 name ................................................................................................................
Value .................................................................................................................................
Use ....................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[4]
4
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(b) Write an algorithm to perform the set up and ‘On Entry’ part of Task 1, using either pseudocode, programming statements or a flowchart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
5
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(c) Explain how your program calculates if a car has overstayed the permitted parking time and how the charge is calculated and output (part of Task 3). Any programming statements you use in your answer must be fully explained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) One of the inputs required ‘On Exit’ in Task 1 is ticket number. State two items of suitable test data you could use to test your input validation and state why you chose them.
Test data 1 ................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Test data 2 ................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
6
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Section B
2 Describe, using an example, the purpose of the following checks during data entry.
(a) Validation check
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Verification check
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
3 This section of program code reads the contents of the array, totals the numbers and prints out the sum and average of the numbers. Assume the array is full.
Complete the four missing items by writing them in the spaces provided in this code.
1 Numbers[1:30]
2 Total = 0
3 .............................................. = 0
4 FOR Count = 1 TO .........................................................
5 Number = Numbers[Count]
6 Total = ......................................................... + Number
7 Counter = Counter + 1
8 .................................................................................................. Count
9 PRINT′Thesumofthenumbersyouenteredis′,Number
10 PRINT′Theaverageofthenumbersyouenteredis′,Number/Counter [4]
7
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
4 An algorithm is written in pseudocode:
INPUT Number IF Number > 100 THENOUTPUT″Thenumberistoolarge″ ELSEOUTPUT″Thenumberisacceptable″ ENDIF
(a) Describe the purpose of the algorithm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) The algorithm only allows one attempt at inputting an acceptable value.
State how you would change the algorithm so that it continues until a suitable input is supplied.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Re-write the algorithm in full, using pseudocode, to implement your answer to part (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
8
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
5 The flowchart allows a set of 10 numbers to be entered; it finds and outputs the largest of these numbers.
START
Counter Counter
Is Counter< 10 ?
OUTPUT Max
END
+ 1
INPUT Num
Is Num >Max ?
Yes
Yes
Max NumNo
No
Max –1000.00Counter 0
9
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
(a) Complete the trace table for the input data:
6.30, 18.62, 50.01, 3.13, 2.05, 50.10, 40.35, 30.69, 0.85, 17.30
Max Counter Num OUTPUT
[3]
(b) Describe two different changes you should make to the flowchart to find the smallest number instead of the largest number.
Change 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Change 2 ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
6 A shop that sells copies of movies to the public has set up a new database table called 2018MOV to store some new releases. Part of this table is given, showing the catalogue number, title, genres and available formats (Blu-ray, DVD or streaming) of each movie.
CatNo Title Genre 1 Genre 2 Blu-ray DVD Stream
18m01 Battery Rangers Adventure Fantasy Yes No Yes
18m02 Golfwatch Comedy Drama Yes No Yes
18m03 Chair 27 Comedy Drama Yes Yes No
18m04 Wander Woman Action Fantasy Yes No Yes
18m05 Justine League Action Fantasy Yes Yes Yes
18m06 That Horror Thriller Yes Yes No
18m07 Insect Dude Action Fantasy No Yes No
18m08 Dover Beach Action History No Yes No
18m12 Slow 25 Action Thriller No Yes No
18m15 Kongkers Adventure Fantasy No Yes No
18m16 Transducers: The Last Night Action Sci-Fi Yes Yes Yes
18m17 The Pale Tower Fantasy Sci-Fi Yes Yes No
18m19 Bea and the Bute Fantasy Romance Yes Yes Yes
18m21 The Daddy Action Fantasy No No Yes
18m22 Planet Wars: Episode X Sci-Fi Action Yes No Yes
18m23 Guardians of the Milky Way Action Sci-Fi Yes Yes Yes
18m26 Odin Horror Sci-Fi No Yes Yes
18m27 That Fantasy Sci-Fi No No Yes
18m30 Underneath Action Horror Yes No No
18m31 Debatable Me Animation Action Yes Yes No
(a) State the number of records in this part of the table.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Give the name of the field that should be used for the primary key.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the reason for choosing this field for the primary key.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
11
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
(c) Complete the table to show the most appropriate data type for each field based on the data shown in the table at the start of question 6.
Field Data type
CatNo
Title
Genre 1
Stream
[2]
(d) List the output that would be given by this query-by-example.
Field: CatNo Title Genre 1 Blu-ray DVD Stream
Table: 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV 2018MOV
Sort:
Show: 3 3 3 3 3
Criteria: =“Comedy”
or:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Using the query-by-example grid, write a query to identify all the movies that are categorised as Sci-Fi and available to stream. Only display the catalogue number and title of the film, with the titles listed in alphabetical order.
Field:
Table:
Sort:
Show:
Criteria:
or:
[4]
12
0478/23/M/J/18© UCLES 2018
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
BLANK PAGE